JP7526004B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows gaming.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with electronic components such as display means such as liquid crystal displays and light-emitting means such as LEDs (light-emitting diodes).

For example, this type of gaming machine is capable of displaying an amount display indicating the amount of gaming value awarded when the player is in an advantageous state that is favorable to the player, and a notification display notifying the player that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 A

In such gaming machines, specific character displays in which specific areas are surrounded by lines forming characters are used for various displays such as award amount displays and notification displays, and specific displays corresponding to various states such as advantageous states are displayed, but there was room for improvement in the relationship between such specific character displays and specific displays.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can display displays including specific character displays in a favorable manner in relation to specific displays .

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A specific member;
An electronic component provided on a front side of the specific member;
a light-transmitting member that transmits light and covers a front side of the electronic component;
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
Equipped with
The electronic component and the specific member are formed to be visible to a player through the translucent member,
The display means includes:
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, a background display relating to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The indication of the amount of the provided liquid is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
the notification display is a display that ends when the specific period has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the indication of the amount of the imparted item is not changed during display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display,
the background display is not visible from the specific region of the specific character display included in the imparting amount display,
When a display position of a specific character display included in the notification display is changed, the background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display,
The display means includes:
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the display of the amount of the prize.
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and starting to display the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display including the specific character display can be suitably displayed in relation to the background display.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) capable of controlling a state advantageous to a player (e.g., a jackpot gaming state),
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5);
Equipped with
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12 ),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.),
The display means includes:
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In the second display area, an award amount display regarding the amount of the awarded gaming value can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In at least the first display region, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image, as notification displays that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image at least in the first display region 20SH51, as an acquired number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number", an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquired number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "2000 balls" etc.).
The award amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20 SHK is updated each time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state, etc.),
The notification display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, etc.),
The characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.),
The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.),
The specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area, etc.),
The specific characters used in the notification display are visible in the specific area against the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are visible in the background image from a specific area, etc.),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are made less noticeable by the decorative pattern, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. Also, the display including the specific characters can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the background image.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of displaying an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a notification display that notifies the player that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, as shown in JP 2019-17403 A. In such gaming machines, for example, for various displays such as the amount display and the notification display, specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed are used, and background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states are displayed, but there is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image, and in view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can display a display including specific characters in a favorable relationship with the background image.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.),
Display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.),
The display means includes:
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In the second display area, an award amount display regarding the amount of the awarded gaming value can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
In at least the first display region, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image, as notification displays that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image at least in the first display region 20SH51, as an acquired number notification display 20SHKH that notifies that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number", an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquired number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state reaches "2000 balls" etc.).
The award amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display 20 SHK is updated each time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot gaming state, etc.),
The notification display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, etc.),
The characters used in the notification display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.),
The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.),
The specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area, etc.),
The specific characters used in the notification display are visible in the specific area against the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are visible in the background image from a specific area, etc.),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background image.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance control board related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display control related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of text display setting information related to feature parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. A figure showing an example of text display related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a screen display relating to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect drawing synthesis process related to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of image processing relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of image display relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. A diagram showing the reach performance contents and drawing processing patterns related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of determining a drawing process pattern for characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK; A diagram showing the performance execution period for feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A figure showing an example of performance execution related to feature parts 01AK and 02AK. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 75SG. A front view showing the game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. This is a cross-sectional view of Figure 10-3 taken along line AA. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 1A is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. This is a disassembled oblique view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as viewed from diagonally front. 10-7(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10-7(A), (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 10-7(A), and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 10-7(A). 1A is a front view showing a base member, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an LED board, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11(B) is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first presentation unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. A diagram for comparing the first presentation unit and the variable winning ball unit. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining similar colors. (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. 10-17(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G of FIG. 10-17(A), and FIG. 10-17(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line H-H of FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base material and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit. (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. 10-20, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 10-20. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in Figure 10-20. An explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. A diagram showing the presentation mode when the third presentation unit and the fourth presentation unit emit light. (A) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the third performance unit located at the performance position. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. A figure showing background art related to a first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number notification in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the result in the third form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing examples of the presentation operation of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion provided by an ending background image in the third form of feature section 20SH. A figure showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing how the remaining number of times display appears in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. A figure showing an example of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display presentation operation in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation action when a winning occurs during a round in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion by the over winning effect in feature section 19SH. This figure shows an example of a presentation operation when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won in characteristic section 19SH and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs. A figure showing another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
Predetermined electronic components (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are difficult or impossible to see by a player;
A predetermined component (e.g., a component for fixing the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component;
Equipped with
The predetermined member is characterized in that it has a color that is not similar to that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, for the specified electronic components that are difficult or impossible to see by the player, general-purpose products can be used without considering the balance with the specified materials, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is characterized in that it is provided at a position farther away from the display means than the specific member (for example, the upper part of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic components are located away from the display means that the player focuses on, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
A protrusion (e.g., protrusion 3A) is provided above the electronic component (e.g., LED board 603, 803) and protrudes toward the player from the electronic component,
The protrusion is larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic components are hidden in the shadow of the protruding portion, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603 and 803) and the specific members (e.g., base members 601 and 801) are dark in color (e.g., black) (modified example).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the electronic components can be more easily hidden in the shadow of the protruding parts, making them less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the specific member is more visible than the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be made relatively less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., the base member 301) (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
The electronic component (e.g., the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specific member (e.g., base member 301) is provided with a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that has at least a part of the same configuration as the circuit pattern (e.g., printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board (see Figures 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The specific member (e.g., the base member 301) has a predetermined area (e.g., rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that can be seen from the player side without passing through the translucent member (e.g., the cover member 302),
The predetermined area is provided with a predetermined decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 341) that is the same or similar in appearance to the decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to tell that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) is provided at a position corresponding to the boundary (e.g., boundary part BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the decorative part makes it difficult to see the boundary between the electronic components and the specific member, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing design freedom.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions is characterized in that the number of the decorative portions is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundaries between the electronic components and the specific member are made less visible by the multiple decorative portions, making the electronic components less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 402) has a boundary-corresponding region (e.g., convex portion 410) corresponding to a boundary (e.g., boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) and the specific member (e.g., base member 401) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., a region other than convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The boundary-corresponding area has a lower light transmittance than the boundary non-corresponding area.
According to this feature, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member through the boundary corresponding area, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh or twelfth aspect,
The decorative portion (e.g., decorative portion 420) displays a logotype (e.g., the letter "V") (see FIG. 10-19).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player focuses on the logotype and is less conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the eleventh to thirteenth aspects,
The electronic component (e.g., LED board 403) includes a light-emitting means (e.g., second performance LED 404A) capable of emitting light from the decorative part (e.g., decorative part 420) (see FIG. 10-18).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the decorative portion stands out due to the light emitted, the player is less likely to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fourteenth aspect,
The light emitting means (e.g., the second performance LED 404A) is provided so as to be capable of surface-emitting the decorative part (e.g., the decorative part 420) (e.g., the light from the second performance LED 404A is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 and incident on the area corresponding to the convex part 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex part 410 including the decorative part 420 emits surface light).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the decorative portion stands out due to the surface illumination, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifteenth aspects,
A performance means (e.g., a third performance unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic components and the specific components is provided around the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) and the specific components (e.g., the base member 801) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the presentation means is higher than that of the electronic components, making the electronic components less noticeable, thereby allowing for greater freedom in design.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth aspect,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic components (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to an eighteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixteenth or seventeenth aspect,
The performance unit (e.g., the light-emitting performance unit 630) that is provided in the performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) so as to be visible to the player is larger than the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-20).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixteenth to eighteenth aspects,
The presentation means (e.g., the third presentation unit 600) has a presentation section (e.g., the light-emitting presentation section 630) that is arranged to be visible to the player and is characterized by being made of a color that is more visible than the color of the electronic component (e.g., the LED board 803).
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 16th to 19th aspects,
The performance means (e.g., the third performance unit 600) has a light emitting means (e.g., the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player (see FIG. 10-21 (A)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to easily increase the visibility of the presentation means.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty aspects,
Further, the game machine includes a specific light-transmitting member (for example, a cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided at a position different from the light-transmitting member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) of the light that has entered the light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) in a predetermined direction (e.g., the T direction) is lower than the transmittance (e.g., Y%) of the light that has entered the specific light-transmitting member in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the electronic components are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the electronic components are less noticeable because the translucency of the translucent member is lower than the translucency of the specific translucent member, thereby increasing the freedom of design.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-second aspect is the gaming machine according to the twenty-first aspect,
The thickness of the light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (e.g., the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light transmittance of the light-transmitting member is reduced, so that the electronic components become less noticeable.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-third aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty-second aspects,
The light-transmitting member (e.g., the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is characterized by being similar to the color of the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, since the light-transmitting member blends in with the electronic components and the specific member, the electronic components become less noticeable.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), and the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, a start winning port door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the start winning port door is in a closed position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in an on state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that have an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the bottom left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic parts related to setting values)
The following describes the characteristics of the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a board case that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member, although not shown in the figure. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value change state in which the setting value can be changed, a setting change switch that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame, although none of these are shown in the figure. Note that the setting value change state in this embodiment is also a state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the gaming facility or the like (setting value confirmation state).

These operation sections, such as the lock switch and setting changeover switch, which can be operated by game center staff, etc., are provided in the setting changeover main body and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear of the board case so that they can be operated without opening the board case.

The circuit board case housing the lock switch and the setting changeover switch is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the gaming machine frame is closed, and they can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame with a specified door key. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key held by an attendant at the gaming facility, it can only be operated by an administrator who holds the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF using the setting key. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is disposed on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and disposed on the top of the board case. In other words, the display monitor is disposed in front when the main board 11 in the board case is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame is not open, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open, which is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the display monitor is disposed in front when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame open. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 may be the same as the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display monitor has a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is made up of seven segments forming the figure "8," and a dot located at the bottom right of the seven segments. Each of the first to fourth display sections of the display monitor is capable of lighting or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to change these colors in an extremely short cycle to display different colors or what is known as a rainbow.

A game information display unit may be provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at the lower left position of the game area. The game information display unit has a round indicator, right hit lamp, probability change lamp, and time-saving lamp all arranged together. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of jackpot during a jackpot game. The right hit lamp is lit in a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a jackpot game state as a time-saving state. The probability change lamp is lit when in a probability change state. The time-saving lamp is lit when in a time-saving state. The round indicator is composed of five segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the setting value is set to 6, it is most advantageous for the player, and the advantageous degree decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, the setting value, which is the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming facility, and the setting value, which is the smaller value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, is the more advantageous value for the gaming facility. If the payout rate changes depending on the setting value, for example, the probability of a jackpot may change depending on the setting value, or the probability of a jackpot may be constant but the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change depending on the setting value. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Explanation of Characteristic Parts 91AK and 92AK)
Fig. 8-1 shows an example of the configuration of various circuits mounted on the performance control board 12 with respect to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. In the example of the configuration shown in Fig. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, an audio processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and an internal memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes a command decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 may be an integrated processor in which circuits capable of controlling the execution of performances using some or all of a plurality of performance devices, such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs, and performance movable members such as movable body 32, are integrated on one chip by performing data processing and signal processing based on the performance control command received from the main board 11. The performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, and an internal memory 91AK136, while some or all of the sound processing circuit 91AK133, the lamp control circuit 91AK134, and the motor control circuit 91AK135 may be provided outside the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the stored data of the performance data memory 91AK123 in response to a request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The performance data memory 91AK123 prestores performance data that can be used to execute a performance using the performance device, such as various image data showing a display image on the image display device 5. The image data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, character image data that is sprite image data that is multiple types of image element data corresponding to multiple types of performance images, such as multiple types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, may be prepared. The performance image corresponding to the decorative pattern may be included in the character image. In addition, any character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a performance image showing a person, figure, symbol, etc., and a background image may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in advance. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the voice data used for voice output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The performance data memory 91AK123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotating the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32. The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND type flash memory. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal operating state in which the progress of the effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

The ROM 91AK124 stores computer programs and fixed data for performance control. The RAM 91AK125 provides a work area for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the settings of an internal register, and generates a timeout signal that signals the elapse of time when the measured time exceeds the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs. The timeout signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. When the timeout signal is generated, the CPU 91AK131 goes into a reset state, restarting the performance control microprocessor 91AK100.

In addition to the program for controlling the performance, the ROM 91AK124 also stores various table data used to control the performance operation. For example, the ROM 91AK124 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables and decision tables prepared for the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns. The performance control patterns are composed of process data including performance control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and end codes associated with the performance control process timer judgment value, for example. A part or all of the performance control patterns and the performance control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of commands that describes a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK132 in accordance with the order of image processing, etc. The display list may include a mixture of commands for display control, commands for audio control, commands for lamp control, and commands for motor control. By using such a display list to control the progress of the performance, it is possible to control the electrical components used for the performance in a coordinated manner. The RAM 91AK125 stores programs and various data used to control the electrical components used for the performance. The CPU 91AK131 is only required to be able to read out the programs and data stored in the RAM 91AK125 in a read time that is shorter than the read time for the programs and data stored in the ROM 91AK124.

The CPU 91AK131 executes control processing according to a computer program for controlling the performance. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes performance control processing for controlling the progress of the performance by the electrical components for performance according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The performance control processing may include, for example, a fixed data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM 91AK124, a variable data write processing in which the CPU 91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM 91AK125 and temporarily stores it, a variable data read processing in which the CPU 91AK131 reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 91AK125, a receiving processing in which the CPU 91AK131 accepts input of various signals from the outside, a transmitting processing in which the CPU 91AK131 outputs various signals to the outside, or some or all of these processes.

The VDP91AK132 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU91AK131, the register settings, etc. For example, the VDP91AK132 performs control to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various performance displays by determining the switching timing of the performance image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP91AK132 may be a microprocessor for image processing, such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more commonly, a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing, etc. according to the decoded result. For example, a group of display control commands included in the decoded result are supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoded result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. A group of audio control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the audio processing circuit 91AK133. A group of lamp control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. A group of motor control commands included in the decoded result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives video data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like, separates it into video data and audio data, and outputs it. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data, and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the video renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compressed and encoded character image data and text image data from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode the data, and then supply the data to the character image renderer 91AK145 and the text image renderer 91AK146.

The video image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The video image renderer 91AK144 may execute image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, brightness, or a part or all of these of the image shown in the video data, and temporarily stores the adjusted video data in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format to bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the character image specified by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 and the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information.

The VRAM 91AK147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK132. The VRAM 91AK147 may provide areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer is used to temporarily store palette data in which the display colors of characters and text are defined when the drawing process is performed by the VDP 91AK132, and to temporarily store display data of the performance image created by the drawing process. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting signals that display various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 91AK148 may output a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created by the VDP 91AK132.

A frame buffer may be provided inside the VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 91AK147, such as the built-in memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be image data (pixel data, raster data) in a bitmap format created by the VDP 91AK132 based on vector format image data (vector data, vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The frame buffer may include, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a virtual display area that stores display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, display data for performing a screen display of the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 may be created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area may be supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148 and output to the image display device 5.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned to the memory area of the frame buffer. The image display area stores display data for displaying a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The image drawing area stores display data for each performance image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. A V blank occurs in a period for updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Each time a V blank begins, a V blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP91AK132 to the CPU91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, a drawing process for creating display data for each performance image is performed in the memory area assigned as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period), and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this memory area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created in the drawing process during the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 during the second drawing display period, and the display data created in the drawing process is stored in the memory area assigned to the image drawing area during the second drawing display period.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates an audio signal that enables audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133 is supplied with audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132. The audio decoder 91AK151 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may also include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the video data in advance. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in, for example, the performance data memory 91AK123 or the ROM 91AK124. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by, for example, expanding and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls the lighting mode (light emission mode) of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, such as turning on, turning off, and blinking. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls the operating state of the drive motor that drives the performance movable members such as the movable body 32 to be operable, such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase). The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on the instructions and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and the VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built into the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the performance.

Figure 8-2 shows an example of the configuration of the memory area for performance control according to the stored contents. In this embodiment, multiple memory areas are provided, including memory areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14. Each memory area may be provided, for example, in performance data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or in any or all of these. The multiple memory areas include memory area 91AKM11, which stores data related to moving images, and memory area 91AKM13, which stores data related to text images.

The memory area 91AKM01 stores performance control programs and performance control management data, and functions as a management area for performance control programs, etc. For example, table data, which is data constituting various tables prepared so that the CPU 91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting performance control patterns, may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as management data.

The memory area 91AKM02 stores display control programs and display control management data, and functions as an area for managing programs for display control, etc. For example, image processing programs prepared for the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 to perform various image processing, and display process tables that define procedures for displaying performance images, etc. may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02. The image processing program may include a program for converting image data in vector format into image data in bitmap format. The image processing program may include a program for generating a text image in bitmap format based on text written using character codes and font data.

The memory area 91AKM11 stores video data and video related data including related data. The video data may be a multiplexed encoded stream in which image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by a compression encoding process such as motion compensation predictive encoding using multiple frames of original images, and the image compression information is multiplexed with audio data. The video related data stored in the memory area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files constituting a video display process table. The video display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the video displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 in accordance with the elapsed time. The display content of the video is the content of the video that is reproduced and displayed in response to the video data. The display mode of the video is the mode or form when the video is reproduced and displayed, including the display style and display layout of the video. The table data and data files constituting the video display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and related data. The character image data may be still image data in which any character image showing multiple types of decorative patterns, people, figures, symbols, etc. is described in vector format or bitmap format. The character image related data stored in the memory area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files constituting a character display process table. The character display process table is used for a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed in response to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. The table data and data files constituting the character display process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. The outline font data is data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the contour for each character used to display the text image. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to the outline font data. The vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the character shape of each character in the bitmap format image data by specifying parameters of straight lines and curves for each character used to display the text image. The outline font and vector font are included in scalable fonts whose quality is not easily deteriorated even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string by combining multiple character images, and may be any text image that indicates a recognizable unit of a word that is set arbitrarily, such as a sentence, a paragraph, a sentence, a phrase, a word, or a combination of some or all of these. The text image data may also indicate a text image made of only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may show telop characters, subtitles, or other information-transmitting characters or decorative characters. The text image data is included in the performance data for displaying the text image, and therefore may be stored in the performance data memory 91AK123. In contrast, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP 91AK132 executes the image processing program, and therefore may be stored in either the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. In this way, the memory area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123 and the ROM 91AK124 or the built-in memory 91AK136. Similarly, the other memory areas may be provided in some or all of multiple memory devices, such as the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AKM124, and the built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files constituting a text display process table. The text display process table is used in a display control process that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed in response to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form when the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files constituting the text display process table may be stored in memory area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

The memory area 91AKM14 stores audio-related data including audio data and related data. The audio data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 is different from the audio that is played back and output in synchronization with the image in the performance by the moving image display, and may be any audio that can be played back and output as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The audio-related data stored in the memory area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The audio output process table is used for audio control processing that can change the audio, such as sound effects and music, output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 progresses. The table data and data files that constitute the audio output process table may be stored in the memory area 91AKM01 as performance control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the video data read from the memory area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142, which separates the video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 expands and decodes the compressed and encoded video data and supplies it to the video renderer 91AK144. The video renderer 91AK144 converts the video data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the video, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the video is controlled using the video data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, text image data read from the memory area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 performs conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode, including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a specified area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data, which is the stored data in the memory area 91AKM13.

Figure 8-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to the reach performance content. In the reach performance of super reaches such as SP reach A and SP reach B, it is possible to execute a performance by displaying moving images using moving image data and a performance by displaying text images using text image data. The period during which the performance by displaying moving images and the period during which the performance by displaying text images are executed may be partly or entirely the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data is set that is used to control the display when, for example, a text image that combines multiple character images is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, depending on the reach performance content, one of the video data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, 91AKT12 is determined. Of these, the video data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the reach performance content. For example, if the reach performance content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", then the video data 91AKD01 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (jackpot)", then the video data 91AKD02 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach A (miss)", then the video data 91AKD11 is determined. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)", then the video data 91AKD12 is determined. In contrast, the text display process table may be commonly determined even for different reach performance contents, or may not be determined. For example, when the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach B (jackpot)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the reach performance contents are "SP reach A (miss)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the reach effect content is "SP reach B (miss)," the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio in the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)". The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)" or "SP Reach B (miss)" and cannot be determined when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)" or "SP Reach A (miss)". In this way, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed.

When the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added to the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using video data 91AKD11. When the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, and when the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (miss)", a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD12. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added to a video displayed using video data 91AKD02 and a video displayed using video data 91AKD12. Therefore, a text image using a common text display process table can be added to a plurality of videos displayed using different video data.

Figure 8-4 shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-4 (A1) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A, and Figure 8-4 (A2) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in response to the reach performance of SP Reach B.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text display process table may include a single text display period in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other. The text display period specifies the start time at which the display of the text image to be displayed starts and the end time at which the display ends for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time in the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image in the reach performance starts, or may be specified using the elapsed time from when the variable display starts. However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, it is desirable to specify the start time and end time in the text display period using the elapsed time from when the display of the moving image starts. The elapsed time from when the variable display starts includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes a reach state, so that the timing at which the display of the moving image starts may differ even in a common reach performance, depending on the variable display performance before the reach state. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which a specific image in the moving image is displayed and the timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be improved. The text image designation information specifies text image data used to display the text image in a specifiable manner. For example, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image designation information may be information that specifies the contents of the text image to be displayed using any character code, such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), or JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.). The text display setting information is information that specifies the display mode of the text image in a configurable manner using display style information, display layout information, other metadata, etc. of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be written using a predetermined markup language, such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). Additionally, the text display process table may use any table data so long as it can set text image designation information and text display setting information in association with each other during the text display period.

Figure 8-5 shows an example of display control of a text image using a text display process table. Of these, Figure 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT01, and Figure 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT02. Figure 8-5 (B) shows an example of display control in the case of text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T00, and when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the display of a moving image begins at timing T10.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A1), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. Note that both timings T02 to T04 are included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After timing T05 has passed, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Note that timing T08 occurs later than timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A2), the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. After timing T05 has passed, during the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed.

In this way, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the multiple text display periods may include a period that is partially or entirely common with the second text display period that is different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 is set to include the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 and the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the first text display period has a portion common to the second text display period and another portion common to the third text display period. In this way, the first text display period includes a portion common to the second text display period and a portion common to the third text display period. In contrast, the entire second text display period is common to the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is common to the first text display period. In this way, the entire second text display period is included in the first text display period, and the entire third text display period is included in the first text display period. Also, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. In this way, the first text display period may include a part of the second text display period, and the second text display period may include a part of the first text display period. Alternatively, the entire first text display period may be included in the second text display period, and the entire second text display period may be included in the first text display period.

By setting the text display process table, different text images specified by the text image designation information can be displayed according to multiple text display periods. This makes it possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image, among the multiple components in the display of the text image, according to the elapsed time during the display period of the text image added to the moving image. For example, by setting the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. As the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, a text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed during a text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 as a third text display period included in the first text display period. With this setting, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 of the first text display period, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 of the first text display period, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is added to the display of the first text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01. In this case, it is possible to change the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed, depending on the result of the determination of the text display process table.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and a text image specified by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In contrast, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined in correspondence with the common moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD11. Therefore, even when videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed can be made different in at least some of the multiple text display periods, thereby changing the components in the display of the text images. When videos using common video data are displayed, the text images to be displayed can be made different in all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. When videos using common video data are displayed, the start time, end time, and period length can be made different for some or all of the multiple text display periods depending on the determination result of the text display process table. In this way, some or all of the display period in which a text image added to one video is displayed can be made changeable, and some or all of the text images added to one video can be made changeable.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed. Also, in the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. Note that both timings T12 to T14 are included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After timing T15 has passed, in the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed.

Figure 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields, such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size, which is the size at which the text image is displayed. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of the characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of the characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field can set the style of the characters in the text image, such as standard, italic, or oblique. The textAlign field can set the alignment of the characters included in the text image, such as right-justified, centered, or left-justified. The textDecoration field can set the decoration display added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

Figure 8-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB01. Figure 8-6 (B) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB02. Figure 8-6 (C1) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB03. Figure 8-6 (C2) shows an example of the configuration of text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but is not included in text display process table 91AKT02. Text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in text display process table 91AKT02, but is not included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In the multiple text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image specified by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the multiple components in the display of the text image in the display period of the text image added to the moving image according to the elapsed time. For example, by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 or the text display process table 91AKT02, in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 as the second text display period included in this first text display period, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, there is a third text display period included in the first text display period, during which the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB13. Due to such settings, during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 of the first text display period, only the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by text display setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the first text display period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period, the display of the text image is changed so that the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 and is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style and display layout displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13.

During the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. During the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Alternatively, during the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, different from the display style or layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this way, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA02 can be changed to and displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. During the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is a period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 may be changed to and displayed in a third display mode different from the first and second display modes. Alternatively, during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, which is common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA01 may be displayed in the first display mode, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 may be changed to a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes and displayed. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some text images can be displayed in a different display mode from the other text images. Also, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, such that the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the third display mode and displayed, or the text image in the second display mode may be changed to a text image in the fourth display mode and displayed.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. This allows a common text image to be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 in response to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 can be displayed in a common display mode. Also, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02. In this way, even if different text images are added to different moving images, they may be displayed in a common display mode according to the setting data of the common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 in correspondence with the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this way, even if the text images are common, they may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with multiple text display periods. In addition, in multiple text display process tables, at least some of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with multiple text display periods can be set as common information, and some or all of the information can be set as different information. These settings allow the first and second components related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, to be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4 (A2), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), a text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component during the corresponding text display period, the display mode that is the second component related to the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the reach performance content, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display color of the text image at different rates depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state, such as whether or not it is a "jackpot", or it may be determined to be one of a plurality of display colors. Also, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field may be changeable according to the execution result of the performance control program by the CPU 91AK131, even when the same text image is specified by the text image designation information. In this case, the VDP 91AK132 may change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on a display control command from the CPU 91AK131, a register setting, or the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed by simply changing a part of the data related to the text image included in the text display process table, so that it is possible to display a variety of text images while preventing an increase in data capacity and an increase in processing load. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changed accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image tends to be easy for the player to see, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image tends to be difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the size of the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, may be changed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white may be changed to a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red and displayed. This makes it possible to display text images that are easy for players to see while minimizing any discomfort felt by players when viewing the text images.

Figure 8-7 shows an example of the execution of a presentation in which a text image is displayed using a text display process table. In this example, text images are displayed according to multiple text display periods in conjunction with the video display when the SP Reach A reach presentation is executed. In the SP Reach A reach presentation, a video display using video data 91AKD01 is performed when the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot", and a video display using video data 91AKD11 is performed when the display result of the variable display is a "miss". The video display using video data 91AKD01 and the video display using video data 91AKD11 display a presentation that is a battle presentation in which a common ally character and enemy character battle each other, and it is sufficient that the content of the presentation display is common until the timing when the battle result is announced, for example. Furthermore, if the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT02 becomes higher, and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss," the determination rate of text display process table 91AKT01 becomes higher. Therefore, in the reach effect of SP Reach A, even during the moving image display period, which is the content of the common effect display, the probability of a jackpot can be made to differ depending on the display content of the text image according to the text display process table.

The performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is a performance content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the reach name "SP Reach A" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01, for example, the origin coordinates are (300,30), the font family is a typeface classified as Gothic, called AA_gothic, the font size is 48px, the character thickness is a bold line width corresponding to bold, the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF, the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or oblique corresponding to italic, the character arrangement is centered, and no character decoration is set. In the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 may execute image conversion processing and the like to display the text image in the display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information.

In addition, in the performance execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 in response to the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. In this case, the components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as Mincho, called BB_mincho, the font size is 36px, the character thickness is the normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, the background display color is #220C0C, the character style is normal corresponding to normal, the character alignment is left justified, and the character decoration is unset.

The performance execution example 91AKD21 shown in Figure 8-7 (B1) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the components of the text image are controlled so that the text image indicating the phrase "Chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 has the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600), the font family is a typeface classified as a Gothic font called CC_gothic, the font size is 60px, the character thickness is a normal line width corresponding to normal, the display color of the text image is #000000, the background display color is #FFFFFF, the character style is a normal typeface corresponding to normal, the character arrangement is centered, and the character decoration is unset. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, but the font family, font size, character thickness, display color of the text image, background display color, character style, and character arrangement have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change some of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information and display it.

The performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in Figure 8-7 (B2) includes performance content different from that of text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and the text image specified by text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. In this case, the text image indicating the phrase "Super hot" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has the following display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13: origin coordinates (250,600), font family DD_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho font, font size 72px, character thickness corresponding to bold, text image display color gold corresponding to "gold", background display color #000000, character style normal corresponding to normal, character arrangement centered, and character decoration gold display effect setting by effect_gold. This text image has only the origin coordinates in common with the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02, and the font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, character style, character arrangement, and character decoration have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, it may be possible to individually set data to be changed and data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When comparing this text image with the text image specified by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings, including the origin coordinates, have been changed. In this way, when displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying a text image specified by the text image designation information, when one data among the data corresponding to the multiple fields included in the text display setting information is changed and displayed, it may be possible to change and display other data previously associated with the one data. For example, when changing the display color of a text image to gold corresponding to "gold", it is sufficient to change the character decoration to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold and display it.

The display color and background display color of the text image can be set in 256 steps so that the brightness (gradation) of each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is one of the levels from "0" to "255". In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the color field and backgroundColor field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the color field and backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used to display the character image, for example. In addition, the origin coordinate when displaying the text image can be set by a combination of the horizontal x coordinate and the vertical y coordinate on the screen of the image display device 5. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the origin field may have a common data format with the field data constituting the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a common data format with the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. Such text display setting information may be used to change second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using information common to a performance image that is different from the text image. This reduces the processing burden of changing second components related to a text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

The font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontFamily field may be specific field data that is not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, the character size may be set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data constituting the fontSize field may have a specific field format, although it corresponds to the field data constituting the characterSize field in the character display setting information. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information may have a specific data format that is different from the field data included in the setting information used to display a performance image different from a text image, such as the character display setting information. With such text display setting information, the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, may be changed using specific information that is not used in a performance image different from the text image. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, to display a variety of text images.

When the display color of the text image is set to, for example, gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration is set to a gold display effect setting by effect_gold. When "gold" is set in the color field in the text display setting information, effect_gold is set in the textDecoration field, so that a glossy text image is displayed and an effect image for gold display is added around the text image. In the performance execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when a specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is specified by the text image specification information 91A13, a display style for gold display is set by the text display setting information 91AKB13, so that the specific text image showing the phrase "super hot" is displayed with gloss and an effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the performance by the text image display.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data, adding a performance by displaying a text image using text image data makes it easier for the player to recognize the content of the performance, and also makes it easier to provide information different from the content of the performance. In this case, in a data configuration in which the text image data is compressed and multiplexed as video data contained in the moving image data, problems such as blurring of the outline and deterioration of display quality may occur in the text image display using the text image data that is decompressed and decoded and reproduced. In addition, if different moving image data is prepared according to the display content of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data is likely to increase, and the processing load of the image data is also likely to increase. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed to prevent deterioration of the display quality in the text image display, the processing load of the image data may further increase.

In feature units 91AK and 92AK, when an effect is executed by displaying moving images using moving image data read from memory area 91AKM11, by adding an effect by displaying text images using text image data read from memory area 91AKM13, it becomes possible to easily execute a variety of text image displays with high quality, making it easier for the player to recognize the content of the effect, etc. In addition, because an effect is added by displaying text images using text image data stored separately from the moving image data, it becomes possible to appropriately control the display to prevent as much as possible an increase in the data capacity of the moving image data and an increase in the processing burden of the image data.

The text image display added to the video display using the video data is controlled using the text display process table. Similarly, the video display is controlled using the video display process table, the character image display is controlled using the character display process table, and the audio output is controlled using the audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with each other for a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information specifies the display content of the text image according to the text image data as a first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK146 can perform image conversion processing and the like to display the text image specified by the text image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. This makes it possible to change the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component in accordance with the elapsed time during the display period of a text image added to one video. By making the first and second components of a text image added to one video changeable, it becomes possible to easily and highly accurately display a variety of text images, and to appropriately control the display so as to prevent increases in data volume and processing load.

If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD01, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP Reach A (miss)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD11, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 can be added and displayed. Also, if the reach performance content is "SP Reach B (jackpot)", when a performance is performed by displaying a moving image using video data 91AKD02, a text image using either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. If the reach performance content is "SP reach B (miss)," when a performance is executed by displaying a moving image using moving image data 91AKD12, a text image using either of text display process tables 91AKT11, 91AKT12 can be added and displayed. In this way, a text image using data related to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, can be added and displayed to a plurality of different moving images. By making it possible to add and display text images using common data to a plurality of moving images, a variety of text image displays can be executed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed to prevent increases in data capacity and processing burden.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be displayed in a changeable display style at multiple times by using text image designation information 91AKA13 and text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image showing the phrase "Super hot" may be a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image whose display content suggests that the display result of the variable display has a high probability of being a "jackpot". In this way, when a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group is displayed, a second component such as the display mode related to the specific text image may be changeable at multiple times.

Figure 8-8 shows a display control example in which the display style of a text image showing the phrase "Super hot" can be changed at multiple times. In this display control example, during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, the display color is gold and no character decoration is set during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042, and the display color is gold and character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. Note that as the display style of the text image common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is set to DD_mincho, a typeface classified as Mincho, by the fontFamily field, and the font size is set to 72px by the fontSize field.

Figure 8-8 (A) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to black corresponding to #000000 by the color field, and the text decoration is set to no setting corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. As a result, the display mode, including the display style, of the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" is controlled so that the display color is black and the text decoration is set to no setting.

Figure 8-8 (B) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the text decoration is set to none corresponding to none by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a gold display color and no text decoration. If the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display a glossy text image, for example, by displaying the text image in a gradation. However, if the text image is only displayed with a glossy texture, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

Figure 8-8 (C) shows a case where a text image of the phrase "Super hot" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the display color of the text image is set to gold corresponding to "gold" by the color field, and the character decoration is set to an effect display setting for gold display corresponding to effect_gold by the textDecoration field. This controls the display mode, including the display style, so that the text image showing the phrase "Super hot" has a display color of gold and character decoration with an effect display setting for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to an effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, an effect image can be added around the text image by, for example, the display color of the outline border or shadow in the text image, the border display by bevel or emboss, a layer style that adds a glow, or a combination of some or all of these. This not only gives the text image a glossy appearance, but also adds an effect image around the text image, making it easier for players to recognize the gold display and enhancing the player's impression of the text image display.

In text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a portion of a text image may be displayed in a display style different from the other portions by using text image designation information 91AKA02 and text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. Text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". Text display setting information 91AKB02 may be set so that a portion of the text image "character" from the text information showing the line "If this character wins..." has a text image display color, background display color, and character style different from the other portions.

Figure 8-9 shows an example of a display in which a portion of a text image has a different display style from the other portions. In this example, a portion of the text image "CHARACTER" is displayed with a white display color, a black background display color, and an italic character style, while the other portions of the text image are displayed with a black display color, a white background display color, and a normal character style. Corresponding to a portion of the text image "CHARACTER", text display setting information 91AKB02 sets the display color of the text image to white corresponding to #FFFFFF using the color field, the background display color to black corresponding to #000000 using the backgroundColor field, and the character style to italic using the fontStyle field. Corresponding to the other portions of the text image, text display setting information 91AKB02 sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000 using the color field, the background display color to white corresponding to #FFFFFF, and the character style to normal using the fontStyle field. This allows a portion of the text image to be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, enhancing the player's impression of the displayed text image.

In displaying a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, a portion that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the progress of the performance by the video image display. For example, when the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines progresses with the display of a video image, a portion of the text image that corresponds to the progress status may be displayed in a different display style from the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. The display style may be changeable so that a portion of the text image is displayed in a fade-in or fade-out display according to the progress of the performance of the piece of music or the audio playback of lines. The portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions may be changeable according to the elapsed time in the execution of any performance, not limited to the situation in which the performance of a piece of music or the audio playback of lines progresses with the display of a video image. In this way, the portion of the text image that is displayed in a different display style from the other portions is changed according to the progress of the performance, thereby enhancing the player's impression of the display of the text image.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

As a specific example, during the display period of a text image added to one video, the display control may execute one of the following two control operations: a display control that changes the display content of the text image serving as the first component and the display mode of the text image serving as the second component according to elapsed time, and a display control that adds a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of videos and enables display; and a display control that executes one of the following control operations without executing the other. The first and second components related to the text image may be, for example, any components related to the display content and display mode of the text image that can be changed. Instead of a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to a part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any components related to the display of the text image may be changeable. For example, any components that can be set related to the display of the text image, such as the time interval or movement width for updating the display position when the text image is moved and displayed, the magnification rate or reduction rate when the text image is enlarged or reduced and displayed, and the time interval or change amount for updating the magnification rate or reduction rate when these magnification rates or reduction rates are changed according to elapsed time, may be changeable.

When displaying a text image corresponding to a common display content, the display mode of the text image is changed not limited to changing the display color of the text image set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), but may be changed to any display mode such as an arbitrary display style or display layout. For example, a text image in a display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to any display mode such as origin coordinates, font family, font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these, instead of or in addition to the display color of the text image, during the corresponding text display period. A text image in a display mode set by text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changed to a display mode different from that of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01.

The text image data is not limited to being stored in memory area 91AKM13 as data separate from the video data, and at least some of the text image data may be included in the video data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive writing, may be multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of the video data, and a text image of a specific form may be displayed by decompressing and decoding video data separated from the video data. In this case, data relating to the text image of a specific form is included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11. In this way, data relating to the text image may include specific text image related data included in the video data and stored in memory area 91AKM11, and normal text image related data stored in memory area 91AKM13.

The text display setting information included in the text display process table may be configured with field data corresponding to parts of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields, or may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 are specified by the text image designation information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 can be read without using font data, and the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings, such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data related to text display settings, such as textSize.

The scalable font data, such as outline font data and vector font data, stored in the memory area 91AKM13 may be prepared as only data corresponding to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be prepared as data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as general-purpose Japanese font data. When only font data corresponding to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, an increase in data capacity can be prevented when the number of text images used in the display performance is small. When general-purpose font data corresponding to text images not limited to text images used in the display performance is stored in the memory area 91AKM13, font data can be easily reused, so that the design burden of the performance that displays text images can be reduced, and when a large number of text images are used in the display performance, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

As the second component related to the text image, the specific text image, whose display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image can be changed at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the phrase "super hot", but may be any text image previously set as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among multiple types of text images, a text image previously prepared for displaying lyrics of a song or a text image previously prepared for displaying subtitles of a moving image may be set as the specific text image. In this way, the second component such as the display mode may be changeable at multiple timings for a specific text image corresponding to an audio performance or display performance in which the performance content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of a song or the playback display of a moving image. Alternatively, a text image in which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow-colored, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern, may be set as the specific text image. Alternatively, the specific text image may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result of the variable display being a "jackpot" is high, and may be a text image whose display content suggests that the probability of the display result being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. The advantageous state is not limited to a jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state. In addition, it may include some or all of the following that provide a more advantageous gaming situation for the player: the upper limit number of rounds that can be played in the jackpot gaming state is a first round number (e.g., "15") that is greater than the second round number (e.g., "7"); the upper limit number of variable displays that can be played in the time-saving state is a first number (e.g., "100") that is greater than the second number (e.g., "50"); the probability of a jackpot in the probability-changing state is a first probability (e.g., 1/20) that is greater than the second probability (e.g., 1/50); and the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times that the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is a first consecutive win number (e.g., "10") that is greater than the second consecutive win number (e.g., "5").

A text image having gloss is not limited to a case where a gold color corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, but may include a case where, for example, silver, copper, other metallic colors, or any display color different from a metallic color is set. When a specific text image set in advance is displayed without being limited to the display color of the text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When any text image having gloss is displayed, settings can be made using the textDecoration field in the text display setting information so that an effect image can be added around the text image and displayed.

When displaying a text image in a rainbow, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence within a predetermined range, such as the character coordinates or display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to rainbow colors corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, rainbow display may be possible by transitioning different display colors for each character coordinate of the text image. For example, at character coordinate 1, multiple display colors may be changed in sequence according to the elapsed time, such as changing the display color from red to orange to yellow, then green to light blue, then blue, and then blue-purple to red-purple. At this time, taking into consideration that red is a color that makes a strong impression on the human eye and that the change in blue becomes dark, the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display may be adjusted, and the display color at each character coordinate may be changed in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, and red-purple. After red-purple, the display color may be changed back to red. This allows the player to smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of a text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially may be displayed within the range of the intra-character coordinates and display time of the text image specified by the text image designation information corresponding to the text display period included in the text display process table. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation by the text image display. Note that the display of the text image may be displayed in a rainbow pattern as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the intra-character coordinates of the text image. Alternatively, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow pattern according to the elapsed time by sequentially changing a common display color for all intra-character coordinates. In this way, a text image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time may be displayed.

The first and second components related to the text image may be changeable to different components or to one of a plurality of components at different ratios depending on whether a specific action of the player is detected. The specific action of the player that makes the first and second components related to the text image changeable may be, for example, a push or pull operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A that serves as the V controller, any other action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, or an action of pressing the push button 31b. The first and second components related to the text image may be changeable based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of the process or control in the detection target, or the change in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target, without being limited to being able to detect the player's action. The detection device that can detect the action, change, or difference in the detection target may be any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the detection target using a specified camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using a camera, the screen display state of a mobile device may be detected, and the display content and display mode of a text image may be made changeable based on the detection result.

A part or all of the effects by displaying text images using text image data may be executed as setting suggestion effects that can suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios according to the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 may be set to 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4, 15/100 (=15%) if the setting value is 5, and 10/100 (=10%) if the setting value is 6. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 may be set to 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the set value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the set value is 4, 85/100 (=85%) if the set value is 5, and 90/100 (=90%) if the set value is 6. According to such a determination ratio setting, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)", the ratio at which the effect by the text image display according to either of the text display process patterns 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is executed is made different according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, an effect is likely to be executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT01, and as the setting value increases, the rate at which an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02 increases. Therefore, when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (jackpot)," if an effect is executed by displaying a text image according to the text display process table 91AKT02, the expectation that the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous to the player increases.

In addition, any setting suggestion effect may be executed at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the setting value is a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set so that in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the setting value is the specific setting value. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executed at a predetermined rate when the setting value is a specific setting value and is not executed when the setting value is other than the specific setting value. In this way, in the range where the setting value is a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the setting value is other than the specific setting value, a limit is set so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, during a special period, it may be possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a higher rate than during periods other than the special period. In this case, a limit is set so that in periods other than the special period, the execution rate of setting suggestion effects is lower than in periods other than the special period. It may be possible to set setting suggestion effects that are executed at a specified rate during special periods and are not executed during periods other than the special period. In this way, during periods that are special periods, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at a specified rate. On the other hand, during periods that are other than the special period, a limit is set so that setting suggestion effects are not executed.

It is not limited to whether it is a special period or not, and may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether any special condition is established. For example, when a special condition is established, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, a limit is set as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the special condition is not established than in the range where the special condition is established. It is also possible to set a setting suggestion effect that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is established and is not executed when the special condition is not established. In this way, in the range where the special condition is established, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not established, a limit is set as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the game judgment or decision, or it may be any condition that can be established depending on the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or decision of the performance. The optional effects are not limited to the setting suggestion effects, and may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or the performance mode may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met, or the execution timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not such a condition is met. In addition, the optional effects may be limited so that a limit is set such that a specific effect is not executed within a range where a preset limiting condition is met, or a limit is set such that the execution rate is lower and the effect is less likely to be executed compared to a range where the limiting condition is not met.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 91AK)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, and includes a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B, a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data related to the moving image, a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data related to the text image, and a moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data in the first memory area. The display device includes a display control means for controlling the display of a character image using the stored data in the second storage area, and a character image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146, for controlling the display of the character image using the stored data in the second storage area, the stored data in the second storage area including data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means is capable of changing the first component and the second component during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, for example, as shown in Fig. 8-7. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during a display period, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 92AK)
A gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, capable of executing a game, comprising: a performance execution means, such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, capable of executing a specific performance that displays a moving image to which a text image is added, such as a reach performance of SP Reach A or SP Reach B; a first memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM11, for storing data relating to the moving image; a second memory area, such as a memory area 91AKM13, for storing data relating to the text image; a video control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a video renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of the moving image using the stored data of the first memory area; and a video decoder 91AK143 for controlling the display of the text image using the stored data of the second memory area. and a character image control means such as a text image renderer 91AK146, the storage data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component such as a text image designated by text image designation information and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means can add character images using data on common character images, such as text images according to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, to a first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD01 and a second moving image different from the first moving image such as a moving image using moving image data 91AKD11, for example. This allows a variety of character image displays to be easily and with high quality, and enables appropriate display control to prevent increases in data capacity and processing load.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component of the character image when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-8. This enables appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be performed.

The character image control means may be capable of changing the second component related to the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-6, by using information common to a specific image different from the character image, such as field data constituting a color field. This enables appropriate display control to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "super hot," and may be able to change the second component related to the specific character image at multiple times, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first and second components of the character image, for example as shown in FIG. 8-4. This allows for appropriate display control so that a variety of character image displays can be implemented.

The stored data in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. This allows a variety of character images to be displayed easily and with high quality, while enabling appropriate display control to prevent increases in data volume and processing burden.

When a specific element, such as the color field being "gold," is set as a text image component, it may be possible to display a glossy text image, as shown in FIG. 8-8, with an effect image added around the text image. This allows for appropriate display control to enhance the player's impression of the text image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the text image display.

When a special element, such as when the color field is set to "rainbow," is set as a character image component, it may be possible to display a character image in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially, for example, from red, orange, yellow, green, light blue, blue-purple, to red-purple, within a predetermined range, such as the range of intra-character coordinates or display time. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and increase the interest of the presentation produced by the character image display.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
The configurations related to the characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations related to the characteristic part 60AK, etc. For example, an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time may be executed as a setting suggestion presentation that is an operation presentation of a suggestion presentation mode, and the first component and the second component may be changeable during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or a character image using data related to a common character image may be added to the first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK)
9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first pending display area 01AKB1, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the first pending memory number. In the second pending display area 01AKB2, a pending display is performed by displaying a performance image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, according to the second pending memory number. In this way, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first pending display area 01AKB1, and the second pending display area 01AKB2, active display and pending display that become specific displays based on information related to the variable display are possible. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called the "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called the "second pending display".

The first reserved display area 01AKB1 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end, and the display area may be configured so that the first reserved items are displayed right-justified. The second reserved display area 01AKB2 may display reserved items corresponding to reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the display area may be configured so that the second reserved items are displayed left-justified. In the active display area 01AKA1, an active display corresponding to the first reserved item that has been erased (consumed) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 in response to the start of the first special game is started, and an active display corresponding to the second reserved item that has been erased (consumed) in the second reserved display area 01AKB2 in response to the start of the second special game is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have a common color or pattern with the first hold display and the second hold display, and may, for example, be a display image that is common to the first hold display and the second hold display and is displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display and the second hold display by executing an active display change performance. In addition, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, a performance image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display, making it possible to distinguish the active display from the first hold display and the second hold display.

A small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position, such as the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in response to variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is reduced in size compared to the identification information image which is a performance image showing a decorative pattern, and may be a reduced identification information image capable of variable display in a manner in which it is partially or entirely common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative patterns. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative pattern includes a portion showing a number and a portion showing a character, the performance image showing the small pattern is an image showing a number corresponding to the pattern number similar to the portion showing the number included in the decorative pattern, and does not include a portion showing a character, so that it may be capable of displaying the small pattern in a simpler manner than the performance image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is possible to prevent the player from misinterpreting the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small symbol display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols that serve as reduced identification information is performed, and a confirmed small symbol that serves as the display result is derived. The performance image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a position that is always visible.

Figure 9-2 shows an example of the configuration of a drawing command for effects. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing commands for effects. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling. Command 01AKG02 is a drawing command that commands color blending for inverting color information. Command 01AKG03 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using a magnification change. Command 01AKG04 is a drawing command that commands color blending for monochrome conversion. Command 01AKG05 is a drawing command that commands color blending for blurring using rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command that commands a change in the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command or as a display list. The display list is a group of commands that perform drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining multiple commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of a group of commands that perform multiple types of inter-pixel calculation settings. For example, in a drawing command that commands color blending, parameters corresponding to the effect to be applied may be set to function as a drawing command for each effect. For example, the internal register of the VDP 91AK132 stores control data that specifies the calculation target included in the display list, numerical data that specifies the parameters, and other register values, and drawing according to the display list is started by storing register values corresponding to the execution command.

When performing color blending for blurring using bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, a reduced image is generated, for example, by texture mapping using a bilinear interpolation method for the image data. When generating this reduced image, multiple reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using the multiple reduced images generated in this way, a composite reduced image is generated by performing a compositing process using color blending, such as alpha blending. The composite reduced image can then be enlarged to render the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data, so that the image is blurred.

When executing a color blend that inverts color information in response to command 01AKG02, for example, a difference calculation process is performed with the maximum value (e.g., 255) for the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (one pixel) shown in the image data. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", 255-80=175 is obtained, and the color information can be inverted. By performing a similar difference calculation process on the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", an image can be drawn that has been generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has inverted color information.

When performing color blending for blurring by changing magnification in response to command 01AKG03, multiple enlarged or reduced images are generated by, for example, scaling the image data. At this time, multiple enlarged or reduced images with different magnifications, such as the image magnification or reduction ratio, are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. By performing a composition process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple enlarged or reduced images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When executing color blending to convert to monochrome in response to command 01AKG04, for example, monochrome conversion calculation processing is performed for each pixel (1 pixel) on the RGB values, which are the color information of each pixel (1 pixel) shown in the image data. In monochrome conversion calculation processing, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome by substituting the RGB values into the calculation formula for color tone conversion. In this way, by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information contained in the image data so that the image has been converted to monochrome.

When performing color blending for blurring by rotation in response to command 01AKG05, multiple rotated images are generated by performing a rotation calculation process on the image data, for example. In this case, multiple rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. By performing a synthesis process using color blending, such as alpha blending, using the multiple rotated images generated in this way and an image corresponding to the original image data (original image), it is possible to draw the generated image by changing the color information contained in the image data so that it becomes an image that has been subjected to blurring processing.

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed, for example, by a coordinate value conversion process on the image data. The coordinate value conversion process changes the position information when drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, according to the offset amount set as a parameter. The UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture to an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so that the image has a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing color information contained in image data, such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05. The drawing command for effect may also include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing position information corresponding to image data, such as command 01AKG06. In addition, the drawing command for effect may include a command that makes it possible to draw an image generated by changing any attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these effect drawing commands, the CPU 91AK131 can also generate normal display drawing commands. Normal display drawing commands perform processing to draw an image corresponding to image data without changing the color information contained in the image data, by not performing synthesis processing such as color blending.

Figure 9-3 shows an example of a screen display configuration including various performance images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The multiple performance images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn in multiple display layers. The multiple display layers are set with different display priorities in advance as display layers for performance images. In the configuration example shown in Figure 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as multiple display layers. Of these, layer 01AKL1 is the display layer with the highest display priority, and draws performance images showing small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL1, and draws performance images corresponding to the pending display and active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL2 may also draw a performance image showing a pedestal below the active display in a displayable manner. Layer 01AKL3 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL2, and displays and draws effect images used in chance-up effects that increase the chance of a win during a reach. Layer 01AKL4 is the display layer with the second highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays and draws effect images showing decorative patterns in the "left," "middle," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Layer 01AKL5 is the display layer with the lowest display priority, and displays and draws effect images that become background images.

The display layers on which the multiple effect images are arranged are specified by, for example, display priority information included in the display list. In the display list, the effect image arranged on layer 01AKL5 may be specified as the first drawing target, and then the effect images arranged on each display layer may be specified as the drawing target in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. In addition, for example, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image by superimposing it may be set in the image data of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5. By setting the Z value using the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each layer 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the layer on which it is drawn. For example, a display layer assigned a smaller Z value may be arranged closer to the front (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a larger Z value, so that the display priority of the image is higher.

When writing image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to a frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may perform a comparison calculation of the Z value to determine the display priority. At this time, for example, image data of an effect image with a small Z value is written to the frame buffer in preference to image data of an effect image with a large Z value. As a result, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value has a higher display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value, and can be placed on the near side (front side) as viewed from the player. On the other hand, an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a large Z value has a lower display priority than an effect image drawn on a display layer assigned a small Z value, and can be placed on the far side (rear side) as viewed from the player. The relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be reversed, and a display layer assigned a large Z value may be positioned closer to the front in the Z axis direction than a display layer assigned a small Z value, and the image may have a higher display priority.

In this way, a rendering process of the performance image according to the display layer is executed, and a display image 01AKD1 containing multiple performance images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after the images rendered on layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are composited so as to be superimposable as multiple display layers with different display priorities.

Of layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. In layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are included in the specific layers, it is possible to draw and display performance images using a drawing process that is different from the performance images drawn in layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are included in the special layers.

Figure 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect drawing synthesis process executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesis process is executed, for example, when a display list including an effect drawing command is transferred based on the result of decoding the instruction code by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing synthesis process is started, the image data to be subjected to the effect processing is read (step 01AKS01). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and temporarily stores it in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., for storage. The image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer among the multiple display layers.

Then, effect color blending is performed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 may perform color blending according to any of commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05, for example, by performing pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified in the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. In the case of command 01AKG06, a coordinate value conversion process may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, the images are composited and drawn in accordance with the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image on which the effect color blend was performed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display of the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 may use some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146 to perform pixel-to-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and store the images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this way, an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by performing the effect color blend.

After step 01AKS03, the images are composited and drawn in accordance with the high-priority display layer (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123, etc., and draws it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. In this frame buffer, an image in a low-priority display layer has already been drawn in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, etc., and transfers and stores it in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146, in part or in whole, execute inter-pixel calculation processing specified by the drawing command, and the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being composited according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by the drawing command as image data indicating an image to be drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, among the multiple display layers. As a result, the image drawn on one of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which will be a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

In this way, the VDP 91AK132 can execute drawing processes to display various images on the screen of the image display device 5, using image data stored in a specified area of the performance data memory 91AK123 or the VRAM 91AK147. Also, by executing an effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, it is possible to change the color information contained in the image data and draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, and on the other hand, it is possible to draw an image drawn on any of layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, in accordance with the image data.

When a display list including normal display drawing commands but not effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP 91AK132 can execute normal drawing compositing processing, which is different from the effect drawing compositing processing. In the normal drawing compositing processing, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command to read the image data to be drawn from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK147, and transfers and stores the image data to the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. At this time, the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute pixel-to-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, or some or all of them, to store the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 in the frame buffer for screen display while compositing them according to the display priority. In this case, images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can be drawn for screen display without performing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data.

Figure 9-5 shows an example of image processing using the effect drawing compositing process. In this case, in a display list including drawing commands for effects, of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in a specific layer, image data 01AKD03 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of a performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL5 are specified as the image data to be subjected to effect processing. When the VDP 91AK132 reads out these image data in step 91AKS01 of the effect drawing compositing process, it stores and temporarily stores them in a sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 provided in a work area or the like of the VRAM 91AK147. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4, and image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 are stored in sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Then, the VDP 91AK132 performs color blending for effects on the image data stored in the subframe buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, if color blending for monochrome conversion is specified by command 01AKG04 as the effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion calculation processing. As a result, the color information of the image data 01AKD03 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD04 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL4 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2). The color information of the image data 01AKD05 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL5 is changed to become monochrome converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK132 synthesizes an image corresponding to a low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, the image data may be overwritten or hidden surface erased according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD14 of the performance image arranged in the layer 01AKL4 is read second and written and synthesized by superimposing it on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. The image data 01AKD13 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL3 is read out third, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis.

Then, VDP91AKD132 synthesizes the image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis process. At this time, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer is specified as the image data to be drawn, and the image data 01AKD01 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL1 is specified next. Each time VDP91AK132 reads out these image data, it writes them into the main frame buffer 01AKF02 and stores them. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the performance image to be placed on layer 01AKL2 is read out first, and is superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis. The image data 01AKD01 of the performance image placed on layer 01AKL1 is read out last, and then superimposed and written onto the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02, and composited.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03-01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is converted to image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 whose color information has been changed by the effect color blend, and the converted image data 01AKD13-01AKD15 is written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in an order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not executing the effect color blend. Therefore, in the specific layers 01AKL3-01AKL5, various images for effects, such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for chance up during a reach, can be displayed by drawing using a specific drawing process such as the effect color blend. In contrast, the special layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are drawn using normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, making it possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game, such as presentation images showing pending and active displays, and presentation images showing small patterns.

Figure 9-6 shows an example of an image displayed by executing the effect drawing compositing process. When a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred, the VDP91AK132 executes the effect drawing compositing process, making it possible to display an image for presentation drawn by modifying color information, etc., contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (A) shows the image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Monochrome conversion calculation processing is processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display images for presentation drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing or the like, which draws with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing processing. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM01, can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing with the normal drawing processing without changing the color information contained in the image data.

Figure 9-6 (B) shows the image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list including command 01AKG02 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display images for presentation drawn by differential calculation processing or the like in the effect color blend. Differential calculation processing is a process for converting and drawing the value of color information contained in the image data so that it is inverted based on the difference with the maximum value. As a result, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display images for presentation drawn by differential calculation processing, which converts and draws the value of color information contained in the image data, as a specific drawing process. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of image display example 01AKM02, can display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing the value of color information contained in the image data without converting it using normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including command 01AKG01 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a synthesis process that performs a blurring color blend using bilinear sampling as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a compositing process that performs a color blend for blurring by changing the magnification as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data using a compositing process that performs color blending for blurring due to rotation as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without modifying the color information contained in the image data using normal drawing process.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, can display an image for presentation drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a coordinate value conversion process that changes the offset amount of the image position as a specific drawing process. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without changing the position information corresponding to the image data using a normal drawing process.

By using these effect drawing commands, it is possible to display on a specific layer an image for presentation that is drawn by modifying the color information contained in the image data, or an image for presentation that is drawn by modifying the position information corresponding to the image data. As a result, even if an image for presentation is drawn using common image data, it is possible to change the color information or position information and draw it by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects and increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 9-7 (A) shows an example of setting the reliability of a jackpot according to the reach performance content. The reliability of a jackpot for each reach performance is the proportion of cases in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state among cases in which the respective reach performance is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of a jackpot is set to differ according to the reach performance that becomes a super reach of multiple types, such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, the allocation of a determination value that is compared with a random number value for determining the variable display pattern may be set so that the proportion of the variable display result that becomes a "jackpot" differs according to the multiple types of reach performance.

SP Reach A1 to A3 are reach effects of the Super Reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP Reach B, and are also called "weak SP reach." SP Reach B is a reach effect of the Super Reach with a higher jackpot reliability than SP Reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach." For example, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP Reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP Reach B is 80%. Therefore, when the reach performance of SP Reach A1 is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about once in five times. In contrast, when the reach performance of SP Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" about four times in five times. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a part of the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized as being similar. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common moving image played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a common character image displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a difference from the SP reach A1 to A3 to be recognized in the case of SP reach B. For example, the SP reach B may have a moving image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach B may have a character image different from the SP reach A1 to A3 displayed as an animation. The reach performance contents may include a performance aspect that allows a difference from the other cases to be recognized in any of the SP reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may have a moving image different from each other played and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, the SP Reach A1 to A3 may be displayed as animations of different character images. Other presentation modes that allow the difference to be recognized may include any display on the screen of the image display device 5, any sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, any illumination using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LEDs, any movement using movable members for presentation, or any combination of some or all of these.

When a reach performance that results in a super reach, such as SP reach A1 to A3, is executed, this includes a case where a drawing performance is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to a drawing command for effect. As a drawing performance, any one of a plurality of types of display performances capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes in response to a drawing command for effect may be selected and executed. As a drawing performance, a display performance may be executed in which an image drawn in response to a drawing command other than the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but an image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect is displayed. When a reach performance that results in a super reach is executed, this may include a case where a performance is executed by displaying an image drawn in response to only a drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing performance.

Figure 9-7 (B) shows an example of the setting of drawing performance contents according to the drawing performance pattern. In this setting example, drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as multiple drawing performance patterns. Some or all of the drawing performance contents differ depending on these multiple drawing performance patterns. The drawing performance contents include the presence or absence and type of drawing performance by effect display, and the presence or absence of drawing performance by strobe display. Drawing performances that do not include effect display or strobe display are also called normal drawing performances. Drawing performances by effect display or strobe display are also called specific drawing performances.

The effect display is a performance display that changes and draws the color information contained in the image data when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. Types of effect displays include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochrome conversion effect uses command 01AKG04 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image that has been subjected to monochrome conversion. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 of the effect drawing commands to draw and display a performance image with inverted color information. In this way, the effect display only needs to be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data. Note that the effect display may also be able to display a performance image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, for example, using command 01AKG06 of the effect drawing commands.

The strobe display is a performance display that alternates between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image (e.g., black or white) with settings different from the image data every predetermined number of frames. The strobe display may be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. In contrast, the strobe display may not be executed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, while the strobe display may be executed within the range of images drawn on specific layers, a limit may be set that the strobe display is not executed within the range of images drawn on special layers. A pause display may be performed together with the strobe display. The pause display is a performance display that gives the impression that the progress of the performance by the display of images has been paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. Note that the pause display may be performed when the strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-8 shows an example of how a drawing presentation pattern is determined. For example, in the presentation control process in step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, it is sufficient to determine one of a number of drawing presentation patterns in a ratio according to the variable display result and reach presentation content as shown in Figure 9-8. When a variable display pattern corresponding to the reach presentation of a super reach is specified, the CPU91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing presentation pattern, and determines the drawing presentation pattern based on the random number value by referring to a drawing presentation pattern determination table according to the variable display result and reach presentation content.

In the determination example shown in Figure 9-8, when the variable display result is "miss", if the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, there is a 60% (=60/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 5% (=5/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 10% (=10/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 5% (=5/100) probability that it will be determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. In contrast, when the variable display result is "jackpot", if the reach performance content is any of SP reach A1 to A3, there is a 5% (=5/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a 10% (=10/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, a 15% (=15/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB01, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB02, a 20% (=20/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB11, and a 30% (=30/100) probability of it being determined to be drawing performance pattern 02AKB12. Due to this determination ratio, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs between drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 and drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

The drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern that does not execute a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display. In contrast, the drawing performance patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns that execute a specific drawing performance by one or both of effect display and strobe display. And, when the reach performance content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the probability that the drawing performance pattern other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is determined is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". Therefore, when the reach performance content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, if a specific drawing performance, which is a drawing performance by effect display or strobe display, is executed, the probability that the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to be a jackpot is higher than when the specific drawing performance is not executed. In addition, the determination rate of drawing performance patterns other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is set according to the variable display result so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than that of drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, only drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is set so that no other pattern can be determined. When the reach performance content is SP Reach B, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "strong SP reach" that has a higher jackpot reliability than the SP reaches A1 to A3. In such a case, if a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and there is a risk of reducing interest in the game. Therefore, a restriction is set as a limit that a specific drawing performance by effect display or strobe display is not executed within the range where the reach performance content is SP Reach B. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reach performance of the super reach, which has a high jackpot reliability, and appropriately increases interest in the game.

When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, it can be determined to be any of the drawing performance patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different rates depending on the variable display result. When the reach performance content is any of the SP reaches A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" with a lower jackpot reliability than in the case of SP reach B. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the probability that it is controlled to a jackpot game state increases. In this way, when the reach effect content is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, the specific drawing effect is executed, which increases the probability of control to a jackpot game state. Therefore, even in the case of a super reach reach effect, which has a low jackpot reliability, the execution of the specific drawing effect can heighten the player's expectations and appropriately increase the player's interest in the game.

Note that even when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a specified rate. However, when the reach performance content is SP reach B, it may be possible to determine a pattern other than drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3. In this way, a restriction may be set as a limit such that in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach B, specific drawing performances using effect displays or strobe displays can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the reach performance content is SP reach A1 to A3.

Figure 9-9 (A) shows the performance execution period in the variable display of a super reach. When the variable display of a super reach is executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display can be divided into a plurality of performance execution periods such as performance execution periods D0 to D4. The performance execution period D0 is the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the execution of the reach performance after the reach is established. The performance execution period D1 is the period from the start of the reach performance execution period in which the reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed to the start of the chance up performance execution period in which the chance up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is the period from the start of the chance up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period in which the result notification performance can be executed after the chance up performance execution period ends. The result notification performance may be any performance that notifies the performance result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the reach performance that becomes a super reach. The performance execution period D3 is the period from the start to the end of the result notification performance execution period. The performance execution period D4 is the period from the end of the result notification performance execution period to the end of the variable display.

Figure 9-9 (B) shows an example of performance control 02AKC01 during each performance execution period. Of the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, during performance execution period D2, which is from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, if the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed. If the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed, so even during performance execution period D2, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed.

Among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D0 from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach performance of the super reach, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. For example, in the performance execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, it is sufficient that a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. Also, in the performance execution period D0, when the decorative pattern is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, or when the decorative pattern constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eye is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed in response to the BGM and sound effect output. In addition, during the entire performance execution period D0, the normal drawing performance NOR is executed, and it may be possible to execute a light-emitting performance using the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display.

Among the performance execution periods D1 to D4 in which reach performances such as the super reach are executed during execution of the variable display, in the performance execution period D1 following the performance execution period D0, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D2 following the performance execution period D1, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. In the normal drawing performance NOR by the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing performance SPE by other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, for example, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. Note that even if a specific drawing effect SPE is executed using a drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, it is sufficient if images drawn using normal drawing processing can be displayed on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, for example.

In the performance execution period D3 and the performance execution period D4 after the performance execution period D2, regardless of whether the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01 or other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is not executed and the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed. In the performance execution period D3, as in the performance execution period D2, the normal drawing performance NOR can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is 02AKA01, and the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01. If the specific drawing performance SPE is executable in the performance execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be returned to the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR in the performance execution period D4 for notifying the determination of the determined decorative pattern that is the variable display result. In addition, the specific drawing performance SPE may be executable in all of the multiple performance execution periods D1 to D4. Prior to the variable display in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning that the reach performance of the Super Reach is to be executed. Even when the specific drawing performance SPE can be executed in a period other than the performance execution period D2, it is sufficient that, as in the case of executing the specific drawing performance SPE in the performance execution period D2, images drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed on the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, and images drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed on the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers.

When a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, a light-emitting performance can be executed using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs. In contrast, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the light-emitting performance is controlled not to be executed. For example, when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs can be turned off to prevent the light-emitting performance from being executed. In this way, when a normal drawing performance NOR capable of displaying an image drawn by a normal drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when a specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by a specific drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR capable of displaying an image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members can be executed, while within the range of the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE capable of displaying an image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, a limit is set in which a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting members is not executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE using effect display or strobe display is executed, the light-emitting performance is not executed, and the game interest can be increased by an appropriate image display that allows the player to easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process.

When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., the restriction is not limited to the restriction of not executing the light-emitting performance by emitting the light-emitting members, and the performance mode of the light-emitting performance may be restricted, for example, by reducing the amount of performance of the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. When the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by lowering the amount of light emission (brightness) of the light-emitting members in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the number of light-emitting members that can emit light in the light-emitting performance compared to when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed. Alternatively, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the restriction may be set so as to reduce the amount of performance by reducing the light-emitting color used in the light-emitting performance (for example, monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing processing NOR is executed.

Figures 9-10 to 9-13 show examples of reach effects and drawing effects. Figure 9-10 shows an example of effect execution when drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is selected among the cases where a reach effect resulting in a super reach is executed. Figure 9-11 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is selected. Figure 9-12 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is selected. Figure 9-13 shows an example of effect execution in effect execution period D2 when drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is selected.

Figure 9-10 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM01 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. At this time, the common decorative symbols corresponding to the number "7" are displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, resulting in the establishment of a reach, and a normal reach reach performance is executed. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM01, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed as appropriate in response to the performance execution period D0. For example, it is sufficient to be able to execute a light-emitting performance using light-emitting components such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the background music and sound effect output from the establishment of a reach until it develops into a super reach.

Figure 9-10 (B) shows a performance execution example 02AKM02 in which a normal reach reach performance transitions to a super reach reach performance in response to the start of performance execution period D1. Figures 9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) show performance execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when a super reach reach performance progresses in performance execution period D1. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the performance execution period D1, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (E) shows a performance execution example 02AKM05 when a chance-up performance during reach is executed during performance execution period D2. Figure 9-10 (F) shows a performance execution example 02AKM06 when a reach performance is executed after a chance-up performance during performance execution period D2. In the case of performance execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance by drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 is executed in accordance with the performance execution period D2. At this time, because it is drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, a specific drawing performance SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (G) shows a performance execution example 02AKM07 when a result notification performance is executed during performance execution period D3. At this time, a reach performance in which the performance content varies depending on the variable display result is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the confirmed decorative pattern is temporarily displayed as a swaying display or the like in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM07, since it is performance execution period D3, a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance can be executed regardless of the result of the drawing performance pattern determination, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-10 (H) shows a performance execution example 02AKM08 in which a confirmation notification of the variable display result is executed during performance execution period D4. At this time, as the reach performance of the super reach ends, the confirmed decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM08, since it is performance execution period D4, it is possible to execute a normal drawing performance NOR accompanied by a light-emitting performance, regardless of the result of the determination of the drawing performance pattern, and a specific drawing performance SPE is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM11 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time may be the same as the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05. However, a pause display may be started in response to drawing performance pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in VRAM 91AK147 and stored so as to be reusable. Also, in response to the execution of a specific drawing performance SPE using a strobe display, control is performed so that a light emitting performance is not executed.

Figure 9-11 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM12, which is a case where a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM11. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM12, an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, need only be able to display an image drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-11 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM13, which follows performance execution example 02AKM12 and executes a performance display that pauses during a strobe display. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM13, it is sufficient to execute a pause display during a strobe display by repeating the pause display started in performance execution example 02AKM11. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read from the copy area of VRAM 91AK147 can be drawn to repeatedly pause and display an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM11.

Figure 9-11 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM14, which follows performance execution example 02AKM13 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution example 02AKM12. Figure 9-11 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM15, which follows performance execution example 02AKM14 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13. Figure 9-11 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM16, which follows performance execution example 02AKM15 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14. Figure 9-11 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM17, which follows performance execution example 02AKM16 and repeatedly displays an image similar to performance execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13 and 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM18, which, following performance execution example 02AKM17, repeatedly displays images similar to those of performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a pause display can be performed along with a strobe display. After the strobe display of performance execution example 02AKM18 ends, the display returns to normal drawing performance NOR and is controlled to execute a light-emitting performance.

This type of strobe display can be performed without dedicated image data, using an image with settings different from the image data, in response to a drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the image for the effect is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE with a strobe display in response to a drawing command, it is possible to give the player a different impression from the normal drawing effect NOR, and it is possible to prevent the amount of image data from increasing while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Figure 9-12 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM21 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of the performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images drawn using monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process, are displayed.

Figure 9-12 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM22, in which a strobe display is executed following performance execution example 02AKM21. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM22, similar to performance execution example 02AKM12, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, only need to be able to display images drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-12 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM23, in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a monochrome conversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB02 during the execution of the reach chance up performance following performance execution example 02AKM22. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient to be able to continue the reach chance up performance that was started in performance execution example 02AKM21. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the monochrome conversion effect, even if a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-12 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM24, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM22 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM23. Figure 9-12 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM25, which displays a reach performance after the chance up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM24. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, display images drawn by monochrome conversion calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-12 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM26, which, following performance execution example 02AKM25, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24. Figure 9-12 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM27, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM25 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM26. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM25 can be executed continuously. Note that a pause display may be executed as a reach performance during a strobe display, or a pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM28, which, following performance execution example 02AKM27, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26. In this way, by repeatedly switching between images drawn using monochrome conversion with a reduced number of colors in the color information through monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and single-color images with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a monochrome conversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, the impression given to the player can be made different from the normal drawing effect NOR by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the monochrome conversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, so that it is possible to prevent the data volume of the image data from increasing, and to execute a variety of display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the monochrome conversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and the impression of the display effect can be enhanced while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 9-13 (A) shows a performance execution example 02AKM31 in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 when a reach chance up performance is executed in response to the start of performance execution period D2. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM05 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image is displayed that is drawn by converting the color information values using a differential calculation process or the like, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (B) shows performance execution example 02AKM32, which executes a strobe display following performance execution example 02AKM31. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM32, similar to performance execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., an entirely black image is drawn and displayed as a single-color image on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. In this case, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, need only be able to display images drawn using normal drawing processing.

Figure 9-13 (C) shows performance execution example 02AKM33, in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed using a color information inversion effect according to drawing performance pattern 02AKB12 during the execution of the reach chance up performance following performance execution example 02AKM32. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient to be able to continue the reach chance up performance started in performance execution example 02AKM31. Note that a pause display may be executed as a chance up performance during a strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing performance SPE using the color information inversion effect, even when a strobe display is executed, the pause display of the chance up performance may not be executed by displaying an image drawn using image data read according to the elapsed time, as in the case of performance execution example 02AKM05.

Figure 9-13 (D) shows performance execution example 02AKM34, which displays the same image as performance execution example 02AKM32 repeatedly, following performance execution example 02AKM33. Figure 9-13 (E) shows performance execution example 02AKM35, which displays a reach performance after a chance-up performance in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM34. The performance display at this time differs from the performance display in performance execution example 02AKM06 in that in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, images are displayed that are drawn by converting the color information values using differential calculation processing, which is a specific drawing process.

Figure 9-13 (F) shows performance execution example 02AKM36, which, following performance execution example 02AKM35, repeatedly displays the same images as performance execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034. Figure 9-13 (G) shows performance execution example 02AKM37, in which a reach performance is executed after performance execution example 02AKM35 in performance execution period D2, following performance execution example 02AKM36. In the case of performance execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the reach performance executed in performance execution example 02AKM35 can be executed continuously. Note that it is also possible to execute a pause display as a reach performance during a strobe display, or to not execute a pause display as a specific drawing performance SPE using a color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13 (H) shows performance execution example 02AKM38, which, following performance execution example 02AKM37, repeatedly displays images similar to performance execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36. In this way, by repeatedly switching between an image with inverted color information drawn by converting the color information values using differential calculation processing or the like using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed using a color information inversion effect along with a strobe display.

The effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect can be executed without using dedicated image data, using an image that is drawn by converting the value of the color information contained in the image data in response to the effect drawing command transferred from the CPU91AK131 to the VDP91AK132. As a result, even if the effect image is drawn using common image data, by making it possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE using the color information inversion effect in response to the effect drawing command, it is possible to give a different impression to the player from the normal drawing effect NOR, so that it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display that becomes the color information inversion effect with the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the displayed image, and it is possible to enhance the impression of the display effect and improve the interest in the game while preventing the data volume of the image data from increasing.

By executing a specific drawing performance SPE using effect displays or strobe displays, it is possible to give the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. When the reach performance content is any of SP Reach A1 to A3, a reach performance of a super reach is executed, which is a "weak SP reach" that has a lower reliability of a jackpot than SP Reach B, while a specific drawing performance SPE can be executed that gives the player a strange feeling of display performance not found in normal drawing performance NOR. And when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases, so it is possible to heighten the player's expectations and appropriately improve interest in the game.

The invention relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features relating to characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK, and may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such a strobe display, some or all of the single-color image may be replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when a performance image that is a character image is inserted and displayed as a specific image, the drawing performance content and determination rate of the drawing performance pattern may be set so that the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" and the player is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state than when a single-color image is repeatedly displayed.

In the above description, it has been assumed that the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member is not executed when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed. Such a light-emitting performance using the light-emitting member may include a light-emitting display performance by illuminating the display part of the light-guiding plate. For example, a light-guiding plate as a transparent light-guiding member having optical transparency is provided on the front side (front side) of a part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a light-emitting member such as a light-guiding plate LED may be provided near the light-guiding plate, and light from the light-emitting member may be introduced through the end face of the light-guiding plate and reflected by a reflecting part formed in advance inside the light-guiding plate to execute a light-emitting display performance that displays a predetermined pattern or the like. Then, in the performance execution period in which the normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that the light-emitting display performance can be executed based on the determination result of the light-emitting display performance pattern. In contrast, in the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to the drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the light-emitting display performance is not executed.

Furthermore, light emission effects using such light-emitting members may include button light emission effects produced by illuminating a button light-emitting section attached inside the push button 31B. In this case, during a performance execution period in which a normal drawing performance NOR is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient that a button light emission effect can be executed based on the result of determining the button light emission performance pattern, etc. In contrast, during a performance execution period in which a specific drawing performance SPE is executed in response to a drawing performance pattern, etc., it is sufficient to control so that the button light emission effect is not executed.

When multiple display layers are provided, the setting of whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the layer 01AKL2 that draws the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display so that it can be displayed may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In a setting in which the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display may be drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed by the monochrome conversion effect, it is sufficient that the performance image corresponding to the reserved display or active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling such a monochrome display of the reserved display or active display, when a change performance that changes the display color of the specific display related to the variable display such as the reserved display or active display can be executed, when a change performance is executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display may be different depending on the expectation level controlled in the jackpot game state. In the case where the change performance has a success pattern in which the display color of the specific display is changed and a failure pattern in which the display color of the specific display is not changed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed during the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE, and when the display color of the specific display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed. The execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be started at the timing when the reserved display is displayed, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the reserved display are performed, the change performance of the success pattern may be executed, and when the display color of the active display changes to a specific color, the execution of the specific drawing performance SPE may be terminated, and the execution of the normal drawing performance NOR may be started or resumed.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a direction display layer that can display and draw a performance image showing the launch direction of the game ball. For example, the direction display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area when a launch promotion performance is executed as an operation promotion performance that is a left-hand hit performance or a right-hand hit performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by launching a game ball as a game medium, and a first path and a second path are provided as paths along which the game ball can flow down. The first path may be a right-hand hit path that becomes the right game area in the game area, and the second path may be a left-hand hit area that becomes the left game area in the game area. Then, when it is a first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, it may be capable of drawing and displaying a first promotion image that encourages the game medium to be launched toward the first path on the direction display layer. In addition, when it is a second state in which it is advantageous to make the game ball flow down the second path, a second promotion image that encourages the launch of the game medium toward the second path may be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this way, by including the direction display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, it is sufficient that the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the direction display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the performance image that encourages the game ball to be launched toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display the image that encourages the launch of the game medium by a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute various display performances while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image that encourages the launch of the game medium, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As an operation promotion effect, it may be possible to draw and display an effect image that indicates a changeable amount of effect output, such as some or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. The display layers included in the special layer may include an operation display layer that draws and displays such effect images for such operation promotion effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a warning display layer that can display warning images that notify the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the warning display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred when it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the detection state of various sensors such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a big prize door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game balls by the start port switch and the count switch, etc. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the multiple display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by a specific drawing process, while the warning display layer can display an image drawn by a normal drawing process. Therefore, the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality may be capable of being drawn and displayed in the special layer by a normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. By being able to draw and display a warning image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality using a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image notifying the occurrence of an abnormality while executing a variety of display effects, thereby increasing the interest in the game. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of a specific drawing effect SPE in which no light-emitting effect is executed, an abnormality light-emitting notification may be executed by illuminating a light-emitting member. In this way, notifications regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

The display layer included in the special layer may include a suggestion display layer that draws a performance image in a setting suggestion performance. For example, the suggestion display layer may be capable of drawing and displaying a setting suggestion image determined at different rates depending on the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and it is possible to execute a setting suggestion performance in which the execution or non-execution and performance mode are determined at different rates depending on the setting value as a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting value. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggestion images at different rates depending on the setting value, and to draw and display the selected setting suggestion image on the suggestion display layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by a specific drawing process on the specific layer during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, while it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process on the suggestion display layer. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the special layer using a normal drawing process rather than a specific drawing process, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while properly ensuring the visibility of an image suggesting a setting value with a different degree of advantage for a player, thereby improving the interest in the game. Alternatively, the suggestion display layer may be included in the specific layer rather than the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestion display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas it is sufficient that an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the suggestion display layer. By being able to display an image suggesting a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by drawing it in the specific layer using a specific drawing process, it is possible to diversify the display of images suggesting setting values with a different degree of advantage for a player, thereby improving the interest in the game.

At least some of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, when the navigation notification that notifies the player of the stopping order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result can be controlled to an assist time (also called AT), which is a notification period during which the navigation notification can be executed, a performance image that identifiably notifies the stopping order may be displayed on the screen of the image display device as the navigation notification. In this case, the display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that draws the performance image used for the navigation notification in a displayable manner. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order in which the variable display by each of the left, middle, and right reels is stopped, it is sufficient that the notification display layer can draw and display a stop order image that indicates the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, during the performance execution period in which the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the specific layer can display an image drawn by the specific drawing process, while the notification display layer can display an image drawn by the normal drawing process. By being able to display an image that indicates the operation mode when stopping the variable display on a slot machine by drawing it on a special layer using normal drawing processing rather than specific drawing processing, it is possible to execute a variety of display effects while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image that indicates the operation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problems and effects of characteristic part 01AK)
This embodiment includes the inventions shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game such as a pachinko game machine, for example, as described in JP 2018-171129 A, a technology that enables a performance image to be tilted and deformed and displayed according to an instruction from a display list in a gaming machine such as a pachinko game machine, and a gaming machine technology that draws a processed image in which a plurality of deformed images generated using an inverted image are arranged, as described in JP 2012-29947 A, have also been proposed. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, the entire image is changed, which may reduce the visibility of an important image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that improves the interest in gaming while properly ensuring the visibility of the image,
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and includes a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and the image processing means is capable of executing a normal drawing process, such as a drawing process corresponding to a normal display drawing command, which draws in response to the image data, and a specific drawing process, such as a drawing process corresponding to an effect drawing command, which draws by changing at least color information included in the image data. It is possible to display images in a plurality of layers having different priorities, such as layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, and the plurality of layers include specific layers, such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having higher priorities than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02, and for example, in steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, it is possible to display images for performance by drawing in a specific drawing process in the specific layers, and for example, in step 01AKS04, it is possible to display predetermined images related to the progress of the game by drawing in a normal drawing process in the special layers. This prevents an increase in data capacity and makes it possible to execute performances by a variety of displays while appropriately ensuring the visibility of images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data (e.g., monochrome conversion). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, increasing interest in the game.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data and drawing it (e.g., inverting the color information). This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., presentation execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as presentation execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., presentation execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as presentation execution period D2, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light during the first period, and to prevent the light-emitting means from emitting light during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, among a plurality of periods including a first period (e.g., performance execution period D1) in which a specific drawing process is not executed, such as performance execution period D1, and a second period (e.g., performance execution period D2) in which a specific drawing process is executed, such as performance execution period D2, the light-emitting means may be made to emit light in a normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light-emitting means may be restricted from the normal mode during the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The device is equipped with a setting means (e.g., CPU 103 executing setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect (e.g., effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) that suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can execute an image drawn by a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

The game includes a setting means (e.g., a CPU 103 executing a setting value change process S6A) that can be set to one of a number of setting values (e.g., values from 1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, a value from 1 to 6, and can execute a setting suggestion effect (e.g., an effect using effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) that suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can display an image drawn using a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific effect that pauses and displays an image, such as a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 (for example, a specific drawing effect using drawing effect pattern 02AKA02). This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while preventing an increase in data volume, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, a specific layer may be capable of alternating between images drawn using image data and monochrome images (see, for example, performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances with a variety of displays, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R), and variable display of reduced identification information images in a reduced form than the identification information images, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1), can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information images can be drawn and displayed by a normal drawing process. This makes it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 02AK)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of executing a game, and is equipped with a storage means for storing image data, such as a performance data memory 91AK123 or a VRAM 91AK147, and an image processing means, such as a VDP 91AK132, capable of executing drawing processing using the image data, and is capable of executing a specific performance, such as a reach performance of a super reach, during variable display, which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state, and the performance patterns of the specific performance include a first pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA01, and a second pattern, such as a drawing performance pattern 02AKA02, which have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state; and during at least a first period, such as a performance execution period D1, during the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, it is possible to display an image drawn by a normal drawing process, such as a drawing process in response to a drawing command during a normal drawing performance, regardless of whether the pattern is the first pattern or the second pattern. During the performance period in which the specific performance is executed, in a second period after the first period, such as performance execution period D2, if the first pattern is selected, an image drawn by a normal drawing process can be displayed, and if the second pattern is selected, an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as a drawing process according to a drawing command during the specific drawing performance can be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data capacity, to appropriately heighten the player's expectations, and to improve the interest in the game, while enabling performances to be executed using a variety of displays.

The specific drawing process may involve drawing using fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. This prevents data volume from increasing, while enabling a variety of display effects to be implemented, improving entertainment value.

The specific drawing process may involve converting the values of color information contained in the image data, for example by inverting the color information. This prevents an increase in data volume while making it possible to implement a variety of display effects, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, as in presentation control example 02AKC01, a light-emitting presentation by a light-emitting means can be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific presentation, and a light-emitting presentation may not be executed in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific presentation. This can increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of an image drawn by the normal drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting means may be capable of performing a light emitting effect in a normal manner, and in response to the display of an image drawn by the specific drawing process in a specific effect, the light emitting effect may be restricted more than in the normal manner. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A is provided, which can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and a setting suggestion effect such as the effect shown in the effect execution example 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 is executed, which suggests the setting of the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and the image drawn by the specific drawing process may not be displayed as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This can increase the interest in the game while ensuring the appropriate visibility of the image.

The game is provided with a setting means, such as a CPU 103 that executes a setting value change process S6A, which can be set to one of a number of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, each of which has a different degree of advantage for the player, and can execute a setting suggestion effect, such as an effect using effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12, which suggests settings for the setting means by displaying a specific mode, and can display an image drawn using a specific drawing process as the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. This makes it possible to execute effects using a variety of displays while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the image is temporarily stopped and displayed when the second pattern is met, such as a specific drawing effect based on drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. This prevents an increase in data volume while enabling effects based on a variety of displays to be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the second period, for example, as in performance execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, when the second pattern is selected, it may be possible to alternate between images drawn using image data and monochrome images. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in data volume while enabling performances using a variety of displays, thereby increasing interest in the game.

For example, it is possible to perform variable display of identification information images, such as variable display of decorative patterns in "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and variable display of reduced identification information images in a form reduced from the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in small pattern display area 01AKC1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a specific drawing process, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed using a normal drawing process. This makes it possible to perform a variety of display effects while ensuring appropriate visibility of the image, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The configuration related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to the feature parts 91AK and 92AK, the configuration related to the feature part 60AK, etc. For example, in a configuration in which an operation presentation to be executed after a predetermined period of time can be executed as a setting suggestion presentation, which is an operation presentation in a suggestion presentation mode, in a configuration in which a first component and a second component can be changed during a display period of a character image added to one moving image, or in a configuration in which a character image using data related to a common character image can be added to a first moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image and displayed, a specific layer may be drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for presentation, and a special layer having a higher priority than the specific layer may be drawn by a normal drawing process to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, or in a second period after the first period, an image drawn by a normal drawing process in the case of a first pattern may be displayed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process in the case of a second pattern having a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state from the first pattern may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG in this embodiment will be described based on Figs. 10-1 to 10-26. Fig. 10-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-3 is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic part 75SG. Fig. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Fig. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. In addition, the description will be based on the directions of up, down, left and right as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals will be used to designate parts similar to those in the above embodiment, and detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is composed of a game board 2 (also called a gauge board 2) that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (also called a base frame 3) that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50, and when the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate 200 on which obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 211, and external rail decorations 212 are provided on the front surface of the game board, and a spacer member 201 attached integrally to the rear side of the board plate 200. The game board 2 may also be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and is generally rectangular in shape when viewed from the front. It is made up of a board plate on which obstacle nails (not shown) and guide rails 211 are provided on the front surface of the game board.

Openings 2c are formed in the board plate 200 and spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5, which is located away from the rear side of the game board 2, can be viewed from the player's side (front side) through the openings 2c. In addition, the area of the display area of the image display device 5 that overlaps with the board plate 200 can be viewed through the board plate 200.

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board panel 200, and the area surrounded by this center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211, and the outer rail decoration 212 is the area where the game balls flow down in the game area Y. A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by this center decorative frame 51.

A first presentation unit 300 is provided at the lower position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., below the image display device 5. A second presentation unit 400 is provided to the right of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A third presentation unit 600 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, i.e., at a position corresponding to the top of the display area of the image display device 5. A fourth presentation unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200, i.e., at the upper left position of the image display device 5. In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 is provided at the lower right position of the board 200, where game balls flowing down the game area Y can win a prize.

The first presentation unit 300 and the fourth presentation unit 800 are provided on the rear side of the board panel 200, and are therefore visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board panel 200. On the other hand, at least the front faces of the second presentation unit 400 and the third presentation unit 600 are located forward of the game board surface, which is the front face of the board panel 200, and are arranged within the opening 2c, and are therefore visible from the player side through the light guide plate 501 of the light guide plate device 500.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to Figs. 10-5 and 10-6. Fig. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. Fig. 10-6 shows (A) FIG. 1 is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). To assist, emitting areas 506 are shown as dots, and non-emitting areas 507, lacking dots, are shown in white.

As shown in Figures 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 mainly comprises a light guide plate 501 that is arranged to close off the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower areas, an LED board 503 on which multiple light guide plate LEDs 502 are mounted to direct light to the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a focusing lens 504 for focusing light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) that is fixed to the back of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51.

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate, having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness = approximately 5 mm), and is positioned forward of the third performance unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a, as shown in Figure 10-4.

The light guide plate 501 also has a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a light emitting region that emits light by light incident inside from the right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the dotted region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)), and a non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, a non-light emitting region that does not emit light by light incident inside the light guide plate 501 (see the white region in Figures 10-5 and 10-6 (A)).

The light-emitting area 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial periphery appears at approximately the center of the light guide plate 501, and when light enters the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 reflects the light and emits it forward, causing a predetermined image to be illuminated and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

As shown in Figures 10-6 (B) and (C), the light-emitting region 506 is formed on the back side with a fine unevenness (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502, which is incident inside from the right end face 501a, and emit it from the front. Specifically, the light-emitting region 506 is formed with an unevenness (rough surface) that forms a roughly semicircular shape with a constant pitch in cross section when viewed from the side in the direction of light travel. In Figure 10-6 (C), the unevenness (rough surface) is shown enlarged to facilitate understanding, but the actual light-emitting region 506 has fine unevenness that is difficult to see with the naked eye.

When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 formed in the light emitting area 506 (see the halftone dot area in FIG. 10-5). In other words, the light emitting area 506 as a first area forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is formed, and the non-light emitting area 507 as a second area that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits it from the front surface is an area in which a dot pattern consisting of multiple recesses 510 is not formed. In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a specific image (figure) is exemplified as the display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but other display information including pictures, letters, symbols, designs, patterns, and other decorations may also be displayed.

When no light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the entire light guide plate 501, including the light emitting area 506, is colorless and transparent, and the image displayed on the rear image display device 5, as well as the second performance unit 400 and the third performance unit 600, can be seen (see-through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a, the light emitting area 506 emits light, but the areas other than the light emitting area 506 remain colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light-emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a roughly semicircular shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light-emitting region 506 may be formed by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 using a stamper or injection. The reflective portion may also be formed by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

In characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of light guide plate 501 is approximately semicircular in cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of each of the projections and recesses of light-emitting region 506 can be modified in various ways, such as approximately triangular, as long as it forms a reflective surface that can reflect light toward the front surface (front surface).

The condenser lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending in the vertical direction from a light-transmitting material such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 facing the light guide plate 501, multiple semicircular convex portions 504A that bulge toward the light guide plate 501 side in a front view are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which multiple convex portions 504A are integrally formed. Each convex portion 504A is formed corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

Note that the convex portions 504A do not necessarily correspond one-to-one to the light guide plate LEDs 502, and for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. In addition, the condenser lens 504 is not necessarily configured as a single member having multiple convex portions 504A integrally formed therewith, and multiple condenser lenses formed separately to correspond to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(C), the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, the front-to-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is approximately the same as the front-to-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is incident on the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-to-rear direction (without light leakage).

The front surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes backward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the focusing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually slopes forward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. In other words, the focusing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually becomes thinner from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

In addition, a small gap is provided between the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the size of this gap is such that the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibrations occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. This makes it possible to prevent the focusing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being scratched by vibrations that occur during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 will be described. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is curved to form a lens surface, so even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is highly directional, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is diffused radially in the left and right directions within the condenser lens 504. Then, when the light incident on the condenser lens 504 passes through the inner curved lens surface, it is refracted to the right and emitted.

As a result, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 has high directivity, the light emitted from the light guide plate LEDs 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, making it possible to expand the light-emitting area in the light guide plate 501. In addition, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (since the light is prevented from spreading radially), only the parts corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can be made to emit light. In addition, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LEDs 502 is condensed toward approximately the center position in the front-to-back direction while repeatedly being totally reflected in the front-to-back direction, and is finally emitted from the end face of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side (the part with the smallest front-to-back width).

With this configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction. In particular, even if the front-to-back width of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is greater than the front-to-back width of the light-guiding plate LED 502 side of the collecting lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be guided to the light guide plate 501 without diffusing it in the front-to-back direction, so that the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

When light from the focusing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, the light is reflected by the light emitting area 506 towards the front side (the player's side). As a result, as seen by the player, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the reflected light, and a figure is displayed on the front side of the light guide plate 501 by surface emission of the area represented by the dots in Figure 10-5.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when viewed from the player's perspective (in the front-to-back direction), the image display device 5 is located at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is located at the front. When viewed from the player's perspective, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal panel is used as the image display device 5. Note that the image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may also be used.

(First performance unit 300)
Next, the first performance unit 300 will be described based on Fig. 10-7 to Fig. 10-12. Fig. 10-7 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit, and (B) is a rear view. Fig. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first performance unit as seen from the diagonal front. Fig. 10-9 (A) is a CC cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), (B) is a D-D cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A), and (C) is an E-E cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-7 (A). Fig. 10-10 (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED board, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. Fig. 10-11 (A) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first performance unit with the cover member attached. Fig. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of Fig. 10-11 (B).

As shown in Figures 10-7 to 10-9, the first performance unit 300 is mainly composed of a base member 301, a cover member 302 that is arranged to cover the front side of the base member 301 and is attached to the base member 301 with multiple screws N1, and an LED board 303 that is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with multiple screws N2, and is arranged so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the panel panel 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and its surfaces (front, rear and peripheral surfaces) are black. The front surface of the base member 301 has a flat portion 311 that is a flat surface, a recess 312 that is a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed at the bottom of the flat portion 311, and rear wall portions 313A to 313D that are located slightly rearward of the flat portion 311.

The upper part of the flat portion 311 has a plurality of trapezoidal convex portions 314A-314E formed in the longitudinal direction, which constitute part of the decorative pattern 331 described below, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D can be seen between the respective convex portions 314A-314E. The rear wall portions 313A-313D are formed so as to slope upward and rearward (see FIG. 10-9 (B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surface of the rear wall portions 313A-313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the recess 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth sufficient to accommodate the LED board 303, and is formed so that it is surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. When the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first performance LED 304 described below is located forward of the flat portion 311. The recess 312 also has a number of vertically long heat dissipation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED board 303 to the back side.

As shown in Figures 10-8 to 10-9, the front surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a plurality of first performance LEDs 304 capable of emitting light forward, as well as a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) and a plurality of printed wiring 320 (see the enlarged view of Figure 10-10 (B)). On the other hand, the rear surface of the LED board 303 is equipped with a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic components (not shown). In addition, the surface of the LED board 303 (the insulating portion on the front and rear surfaces excluding the printed wiring 320) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and has a first translucent portion 321 that corresponds to part of the flat portion 311 and recessed portion 312 of the base member 301, and second translucent portions 322A, 322B that mainly correspond to the first performance LED 304. In addition, multiple trapezoidal convex portions 324A-324E are formed in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the convex portions 314A-314E of the base member 301.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a front surface that protrudes forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting section 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface, making it possible to accommodate the first performance LED 304. In addition, a light diffusion section 322C consisting of fine unevenness is formed on the back surface of the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B, making it possible to diffuse light from the first performance LED 304 at the rear and emit it forward. The unevenness may be formed, for example, by sandblasting or diamond cutting, and the formation method and shape can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decorative patterns 331 each having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. In detail, each decorative pattern 331 has a decorative portion 331A consisting of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction, decorative portions 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines extending diagonally to the left and right, a decorative portion 331D having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front. By sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331, the plurality of decorative patterns 331 are provided continuously.

In addition, each of these decorative parts 331A-331E is made to look milky white or translucent when viewed by the player by, for example, sandblasting the rear (or front) of the cover member 302 to form minute irregularities, or by attaching a translucent sticker or the like.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303, which is an electronic component having the first performance LED 304, is placed on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered by the cover member 302. However, because the cover member 302 is made of a synthetic resin material with translucency, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 through the cover member 302.

Here, by arranging the base member 301, which is also black, around (around) the black LED board 303, the LED board 303 blends in with the surrounding base member 301, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 301, so the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED board 303 placed in the recess 312 of the base member 301, the cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303. While the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303 can be easily seen from the player side through the first light-transmitting portion 321, it is difficult for the player to see the first performance LED 304 through the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B. In addition, the milky or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E on the cover member 302 are arranged on the front sides of the base member 301 and the LED board 303, so that the milky or semi-transparent decorative pattern 331 can be seen on the front side of the black background.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is placed on the front side of the base member 301, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side. In more detail, the decorative parts 331B and 331C consisting of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect with the boundary part BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is provided across two members (the LED board 303 and the cover member 302). As the one decorative pattern 331 appears to be provided on one member, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side are separate members.

In addition, part of the boundary BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult for the player to see due to the decorative parts 331B, 331C that overlap the front side, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Note that because the decorative parts 331B, 331C are linear, even if they are positioned to overlap the front side of the boundary BD, the area that overlaps with the boundary BD is small. However, because the decorative pattern 331 is formed over almost the entire front area of the LED board 303 and the cover member 302, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members.

The decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged approximately parallel to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish because of its similar appearance to the boundary portion BD. Also, if it is arranged closer to the front side of the boundary portion BD and is milky white, which is brighter than black, it stands out, making the LED board 303 less noticeable. Furthermore, by arranging the decorative portion 331A so that it overlaps the boundary portion BD, it may be possible to make part of the boundary portion BD difficult to see from the player's side by the decorative portion 331A.

In addition, these decorative parts 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same way as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED board 303, and are arranged approximately parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the wiring pattern and form of the printed wiring 320 are similar (or the same), making it difficult to distinguish them, and therefore the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

Furthermore, although the decorative parts 331D and 331E differ in appearance from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD, and therefore stand out more than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary part BD. In addition, a portion of the decorative parts 331D and 331E is arranged overlapping the front side of the printed wiring 320, making the printed wiring 320 less visible, and therefore the LED board 303 is less noticeable.

In addition, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of linear convex portions that are flattened vertically and hexagonally shaped is provided on the front surface of each rear wall portion 313A-313D of the base member 301 so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern 341 is similar in appearance (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, so that a decorative pattern 341 similar in appearance to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 can be formed even in areas of the base member 301 that are not covered by the cover member 302, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

The base member 301 also has rear wall portions 313A-313D as predetermined areas that can be seen from the player's side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A-313D are provided with decorative pattern 341 as a predetermined decorative pattern that is the same or similar in appearance to decorative pattern 331 provided on the cover member 302. This makes it difficult to tell that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members, making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

In addition, the LED board 303 is disposed in a recess 312 formed in the lower part of the base member 301, and is therefore located lower than the upper region of the recess 312 in the base member 301, i.e., away from the image display device 5. This makes it less noticeable as it is located away from the image display device 5 which is the focus of the player's attention.

In this way, a specific decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12) among the multiple decorative patterns 331 is arranged to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player's side, making the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 303 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be arranged on the front side where they can be viewed from the player's side, thereby increasing design freedom.

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 10-13. Fig. 10-13 (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F of (A).

As shown in Figure 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 that is attached to the front side of the play surface plate 200, and a cover member 702 that is provided on the front side of the base member 701, and is configured as a unit in which the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrally provided.

The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at the top right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and the variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the bottom left. Between the base plate 701A of the base member 701 and the cover plate 702A of the cover member 702, there is a game ball path 705A through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball path 705B through which the game ball (game ball P) can enter the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. In addition, below the special variable winning ball device 7, there is an LED board 703 on which multiple performance LEDs 704 capable of emitting light forward are provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game balls passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be seen from the player's side through the cover plate 702A.

(First performance unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first performance unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be explained based on Fig. 10-14 to Fig. 10-16. Fig. 10-14 (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the first performance unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing the main parts of the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-15 is a diagram for comparing the first performance unit and the variable winning ball unit. Fig. 10-16 is a diagram for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in Figure 10-3, the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5, and are arranged so that the right end of the first presentation unit 300 overlaps or is close to the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 when viewed from the player's side. Also, as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-13 (B), the front of the variable winning ball unit 700 is positioned on the front side of the board 200, while the first presentation unit 300 is positioned on the rear side of the board 200.

As shown in Figures 10-14 (A) and (B), the front-to-rear dimension L1A, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the first performance unit 300, is longer than the front-to-rear dimension L1B, which is the thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B (L1A > L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 is XA%. In addition, in the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, the transmittance of light transmitted in the T direction among the light that enters from the front in a direction (T direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B is XB%. In other words, not all (100%) of the light that enters the first light-transmitting portion 321 or the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and some of the light is reflected at the front surface or emitted in a direction different from the T direction at the rear (to spread around). In particular, the second light-transmitting sections 322A and 322B have a light diffusion section 322C formed on the back surface, which is made of uneven surfaces, and therefore transmit light more easily in directions other than the T direction than the first light-transmitting section 321, and therefore the light transmittance in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light-transmitting section 321 (low light transmittance; XA%>XB%).

As shown in Fig. 10-14(C) and (D), the transmittance of light that enters the cover plate 702A from the front in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction) and is transmitted in the T direction is Y%. Here, the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the first light transmitting portion 321 and the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), so that the light that enters from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is less likely to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the back surface. Also, since the cover plate 702A is a flat plate without a light diffusion portion like the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover plate 702A is higher than the transmittance of light in the T direction of the cover member 302 (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A, so that visibility is lower when a specific part on the back side of the cover member 302 (e.g., the first performance LED 304 or the LED board 303) is viewed through the cover member 302 from the player's side than when a specific part on the back side of the cover plate 702A is viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player's side, making the LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, the first performance unit 300 has an LED board 303 including the first performance LED 304, which is an electronic component, and a base member 301 arranged around it that are the same color (black), making the LED board 303 less noticeable. In addition, the front-to-rear dimensions L1A, L1B of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 are longer than the front-to-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the light transmittance (XA%, XA%) in the T direction of the cover member 302 of the first performance unit 300 is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) in the T direction of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), making the LED board 303 less noticeable.

Therefore, when the first presentation unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700, which is located in a different position (to the right) from the first presentation unit 300, are viewed from the player's side, the visibility of the LED board 303 viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility of the game ball P viewed through the cover member 702, so the LED board 303, which is located on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, appears less visible compared to the variable winning ball unit 700 located near the first presentation unit 300. Also, because the cover member 302 is located on the back side of the cover plate 702A, and the base member 301 and the LED board 303 are black, which is a dark color, the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of this embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around it, are the same color (black), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member do not have to be the same color, and may be, for example, the same or similar colors.

Color has three attributes: hue (color tone), value (brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same value (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors), 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones, and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in value or saturation.

Here, an example of "1. Combination of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness))" above will be explained based on Figure 10-16. When the three primary colors of colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a given number (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if cyan (C) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C), if magenta (M) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to magenta (M), and if yellow (Y) is the reference color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees toward the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees toward the magenta (M) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

(Second performance unit 400)
Next, the second performance unit 400 will be described based on Fig. 10-17 to Fig. 10-19. Fig. 10-17 (A) is a front view showing the second performance unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second performance unit with the cover member removed. Fig. 10-18 (A) is a G-G cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A), and (B) is an H-H cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-17 (A). Fig. 10-19 (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second performance unit.

As shown in Figures 10-17 and 10-18, the second performance unit 400 is mainly composed of a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, an LED board 403 attached to the front side of the base member 401, and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403, and as shown in Figure 10-3, it is installed on the right side of the light guide plate 501 so that it can be seen through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 401 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is generally crescent-shaped when viewed from the front, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 403 has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss protruding from the front of the base member 401. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404A, 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 403. A plurality of second performance LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the back of the LED board 403. The second performance LEDs 404A to 404D are angled LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or approximately parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403. The surface of the LED board 403 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is formed to be approximately the same shape as the LED board 403. It is disposed between a plurality of second performance LEDs 404A arranged along the upper edge of the front surface of the LED board 403 and a plurality of second performance LEDs 404B arranged along the lower edge of the front surface of the LED board 403, so that light from the second performance LEDs 404A is incident on the front end surface and light from the second performance LEDs 404B is incident on the rear end surface.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the light incident from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 on the back surface of the inner lens 405, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405. The front surface of the inner lens 405 is flat, so it emits light from the surface like a light guide plate.

The reflective portion 406 is formed with an uneven state (rough surface) that forms a generally triangular wave shape with a constant pitch when viewed in cross section in the direction of light guided inside the inner lens 405. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which unevenness is formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by using a stamper or injection, but the reflective portion may also be configured by, for example, a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, etc.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED board 403. At a position on the front surface of the cover member 402 corresponding to the LED board 403, a protrusion 410 having a shape that is slightly enlarged from the LED board 403 in a front view is provided protruding forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of the letter "V" (logotype) is provided to be light-transmitting, for example, by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 402A consisting of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410, and is capable of diffusing light from the inner lens 405 and emitting it forward.

In the upper region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421A protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404C. In addition, in the lower region of the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex ridge portions 421B protruding toward the back surface are provided extending in the vertical direction at positions corresponding to the second performance LEDs 404D. Note that a light diffusion portion made of uneven portions may also be formed in the portion of the back surface of the cover member 402 where the convex ridge portions 421A, 421B are not formed. In addition, the cover member 402 is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear from the convex portion 410 upward and downward.

The multiple convex ridges 421A, 421B have a continuous uneven portion formed on the rear end surface, and a step portion 421C is formed at a midpoint in the longitudinal direction, and are extended from the convex portion 410 so as to slope upward and downward toward the rear. This allows the light emitted upward and downward from the second performance LEDs 404C, 404D to enter through these uneven portions and step portion 421C, and the entered light is diffused by the uneven portions and emitted forward.

In this way, when the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B emit light, the light from the second performance LEDs 404A, 404B is emitted forward by the inner lens 405 and enters the area corresponding to the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, causing the entire front area of the convex portion 410, including the decorative portion 420, to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the LED board 403, which is an electronic component having the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, is disposed on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. However, because the cover member 402 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if a light diffusion section is formed on the cover member 402 in a portion other than the convex rib portions 421A, 421B from the player's side, it is possible to see the front of the base member 401 and the LED board 403 through the portions other than the convex rib portions 421A, 421B.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(B), the white base member 401 is disposed around (near) the white LED board 403, so that the LED board 403 blends in with the surrounding base member 401, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the cover member 402. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front side of the convex portion 410 is provided at a position that corresponds to a part of the upper and lower sides of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player's side. In other words, a part of the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that it overlaps with a part of the boundary portion BD on the front side of the boundary portion BD, and the decorative portion 420 makes a part of the boundary portion BD less visible, making the LED board 403 less noticeable. Therefore, even electronic components such as the LED board 403 that should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design can be provided on the front side where they can be seen by the player, thereby increasing the degree of design freedom.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 is arranged so that the area covering (overlapping) the front side of the boundary portion BD is larger than that of the decorative pattern 331 described above, making the boundary portion BD less visible and thus making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is illustrated as partially overlapping (partially overlapping) positions that correspond to parts of the upper and lower edges of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player's side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 420 may be arranged at positions that correspond to all parts of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable that the decorative portion 420 is arranged so as to overlap at least about 1/3 of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, the decorative portion 420 displays the letter "V" as a logotype, so that players focus on the logotype and are less likely to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the letter "V" indicating a jackpot is used as the logotype, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot", "BONUS", and "RUSH", letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot", "super hot", and "!!", and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of characters that appear may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second performance LED 404A as a light-emitting means capable of illuminating the decorative part 420, so that the decorative part 420 stands out due to the light emitted, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

In addition, the second performance LED 404A is provided with a decorative part 420 that can emit surface light through the inner lens 405. This makes the decorative part 420 stand out due to the surface emission, making it difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and therefore making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative part 420 is a single decorative part consisting of the letter "V", but the present invention is not limited to this. When multiple decorative parts 420 are provided in the region of the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, and multiple predetermined decorative parts (e.g., patterns, etc.) having a different form from the decorative part 420 are provided in the region other than the convex part 410 of the cover member 402, it is preferable that the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the predetermined decorative parts. In this way, the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 is made less visible by the multiple decorative parts, and the number of the multiple decorative parts is greater than the number of the multiple predetermined decorative parts provided in other regions, making the LED board 403 less noticeable.

In this case, the multiple decorative parts and the multiple specified decorative parts only need to have different aspects. For example, the specified decorative parts may be enlarged or reduced aspects of the decorative parts, or may differ in any one of the outer shape, form, color, size, etc.

The cover member 402 also has a convex portion 410 which is a boundary corresponding area corresponding to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and an area other than the convex portion 410 which does not correspond to the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401, and the light transmittance of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the light transmittance of the area other than the convex portion 410. By doing this, it becomes difficult for a player to see the boundary BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 through the convex portion 410, so that the LED board 403 becomes less noticeable.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described based on Fig. 10-20 to Fig. 10-26. Fig. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-21 (A) is an I-I cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20, and (B) is a J-J cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-22 is a K-K cross-sectional view of Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit. Fig. 10-25 is a diagram showing the performance mode when the third performance unit and the fourth performance unit emit light. Fig. 10-26 (A) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing the state where the third performance unit is located at the performance position.

(Third performance unit 600)
As shown in Fig. 10-20, Fig. 10-21(A) and Fig. 10-26, the third performance unit 600 includes a base member 601, a cover member 602 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601, an LED board 603 attached to the front side of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603. The third performance unit 600 includes a light-emitting performance unit 630, and a light-emitting performance unit 630 that can be moved between the origin position shown in Fig. 10-26(A) and the performance position shown in Fig. 10-26(B). The pachinko game machine 75SG001 has a performance motor 631 (see Figure 10-2) which is a drive source that can move vertically between the pachinko game machine 75SG001 and the light-emitting performance unit 630, and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting the power of the performance motor 631 to the light-emitting performance unit 630. As shown in Figure 10-20, the performance motor 631 is provided at the top of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is generally trapezoidal in front view, with its surfaces (front, rear and periphery) being white.

The LED board 603 has a generally trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a vertical wall that protrudes from the front periphery of the base member 601. A plurality of third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front of the LED board 603. The third performance LEDs 604A, 604B are capable of emitting light forward. The surface of the LED board 603 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back) is white. The cable C that connects the LED board 603 and the performance control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see Figure 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, is formed to have approximately the same shape as the LED board 603, and is positioned so as to cover the front side of the multiple third performance LEDs 604A, 604B that are arranged in front of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), the front and back surfaces of the inner lens 605 are provided with a light diffusion section 605A made of uneven surfaces that diffuses and emits light from the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back surface toward the front, thereby allowing surface emission.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open back, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED board 603.

A decorative portion 620 consisting of the letters "XXX" (logotype) is provided on the front surface of the cover member 602 in a light-transmitting manner by printing with a translucent colored paint or by attaching a translucent sheet on which the letters are printed. In addition, a light diffusion portion 602A consisting of uneven portions is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 602, and the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this embodiment, the logotype is exemplified as the letters "XXX" indicating a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and letters such as the model name of the gaming machine, the title, and the names of the characters that appear, letters indicating variable display results such as "jackpot," "BONUS," and "RUSH," and letters suggesting a jackpot such as "hot," "super hot," and "!!" may also be used. Furthermore, in addition to letters, decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may also be displayed as decorative parts.

In this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 emit light, the light emitted forward from the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B passes through the inner lens 605 and is further diffused and emitted forward through the cover member 602, causing the entire front area of the cover member 602, including the decorative portion 620, to emit light.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the multiple third performance LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620, and the multiple third performance LEDs 604B are arranged in a position that does not correspond to the decorative part 620. By arranging the multiple third performance LEDs 604A along the periphery of the letters "XXX" that make up the decorative part 620 in this way, when the third performance LEDs 604A emit light, the periphery of the letters "XXX" glows in a dot pattern, making it easier to recognize the shape of the decorative part 620.

The power transmission member 632, which constitutes part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light-emitting performance unit 630, is an arm member with one end rotatably supported around a pivot axis facing in the front-to-rear direction and the light-emitting performance unit 630 attached to the other end, but the power transmission member can be modified in various ways, and may be a rack gear and pinion gear, etc., as long as it is capable of transmitting power so as to move the light-emitting performance unit 630 in the up-down direction.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth performance unit 800 is mainly composed of a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, an LED board 803 attached to the front side of the base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the area surrounded by the guide rail 211 so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the face plate 200 from the front of the pachinko game machine 75SG001, that is, from the player side facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001, as shown in Figure 10-20.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is formed in a box shape with an open front, and part of the periphery is formed in an arc shape so as to follow the guide rail 211. In addition, the surface (front, rear and periphery) is white.

The LED board 803 is formed so that its shape in front view is smaller than the base member 801, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801. A plurality of fourth performance LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803. The fourth performance LEDs 804 are angled LEDs capable of emitting light parallel or nearly parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803, and are arranged in multiple numbers along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803. In addition, the surface of the LED board 803 (insulating parts excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material and is placed on the front surface of the LED board 803 in an area surrounded by the multiple fourth performance LEDs 804.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), the light incident from the fourth performance LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting section 806 on the back surface of the inner lens 805, and is emitted forward approximately evenly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805. The front surface of the inner lens 805 is flat, so it emits light from a surface like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency (transparent), and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED board 803. In detail, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A that is provided on the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, which is a portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211, but covers the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion that is aligned with the guide rail 211. In addition, a light diffusion section 802A made of uneven parts is formed on the back surface of the cover member 802, which is able to diffuse the light from the inner lens 805 and emit it forward.

In this way, when the fourth performance LED 804 emits light, the fourth performance unit 800 emits light forward through the inner lens 805, and the light passes through the cover member 802 and is diffused and emitted forward, causing the entire front surface of the cover member 802 to emit light.

Next, the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, the surfaces of the base members 601, 801 and the LED boards 603, 803 of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 are the same color, white, and the front sides of these base members 601, 801 and LED boards 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, making them light-emitting performance bodies whose front surfaces emit light when the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth performance LED 804 are turned on.

As shown in Fig. 10-20 and Fig. 10-21(A), the LED board 603 as an electronic component having the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B is disposed on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side is covered by the cover member 602. However, since the cover member 602 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 602 has a light diffusion section 602A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the rear side through the cover member 602. However, since the inner lens 605 having light diffusion sections 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the rear side so as to cover the LED board 603 from the front side, it is extremely difficult to see the front side of the LED board 603, although it is possible to see the front side of the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the upright walls of the base member 601, which is also white, around the white LED board 603, the LED board 603 blends in with the surrounding base member 601, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 603 and the cover member 602. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, and therefore the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth performance LED 804 is disposed on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side is covered by the cover member 802. However, because the cover member 802 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, even if the cover member 802 has a light diffusion portion 802A formed thereon, it is possible for the player to see the front of the base member 801 and the LED board 803 through the cover member 802.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), a white base member 801 is placed around (near) a white LED board 803, so that the LED board 803 blends in with the surrounding base member 801, making it difficult to see the boundary BD between the LED board 803 and the cover member 802. In other words, it is difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, is less noticeable.

However, the fourth performance LED 804 is an angled LED that receives light from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the periphery of the LED board 803, so that the front side of the front periphery of the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is not covered by the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area in which the reflective portion and light diffusion portion are formed than the inner lens 605, so that the visibility when the LED board 803 including the fourth performance LED 804 is viewed through the inner lens 805 from the player's side is higher than the visibility when the LED board 603 including the third performance LEDs 604A and 604B is viewed through the inner lens 605 from the player's side. In other words, the LED board 803 is more noticeable than the LED board 603.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side (see FIG. 10-20), and the front-to-back position of the front side is further forward (toward the player) than the front side of the fourth performance unit 800 (see FIG. 10-22 and FIG. 10-23). Furthermore, the light-emitting mode of the fourth performance LED 804 of the fourth performance unit 800 is surface light-emitting, while the light-emitting mode of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the third performance unit 600 is point light (see FIG. 10-25). Note that in FIG. 10-25, for the convenience of explaining the light-emitting modes, the background of the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 is shown in black.

In this way, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits a stronger light, so that it is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800. In other words, the third performance unit 600, which is a performance means with higher visibility when viewed from the player's side than the fourth performance unit 800, is provided in the vicinity of the fourth performance unit 800, and since the third performance unit 600 stands out more than the fourth performance unit 800 and attracts more attention from players, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth performance unit 800, becomes less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 when viewed from the player's side, is located closer to the player, and emits stronger light, making it a more visible performance device than the LED board 803 and base member 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 has higher visibility by being different from the LED board 803 of the fourth performance unit 800 in at least one of the following aspects: size when viewed from the player's side, position relative to the player, and light emission mode.

The visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by coloring the front surface of the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600 as a performance means in a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED board 803, providing a decorative section in a highly visible color, or using a cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Furthermore, the visibility of the light-emitting performance section 630 may be easily increased by the light-emitting mode (e.g., lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B.

In addition, the presenter has exemplified a form in which the light-emitting performance section 630 of the third performance unit 600, which can emit light using a light-emitting means and can be operated by a performance motor 631, is used as the performance means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance means may be light-emitting means (such as a lamp section) provided around the periphery of the fourth performance unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or the performance means may not emit light using a light-emitting means, or it may be a performance section that is fixed in a predetermined position and is not operated by a specified drive source.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, a protrusion 3A (eaves) that protrudes further forward than the game board 2 and glass window 50a is formed on the upper front surface of the game machine frame 3. The protrusion 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the view of the game balls passing over the top of the game area Y, but because it protrudes forward so much, for example, when the pachinko game machine 75SG001 is installed on a game island in an amusement center, the area E1 below the protrusion 3A (the area shown by dots in the figure) becomes dark because the outside light from the amusement center is blocked by the protrusion 3A and casts a shadow.

Therefore, by providing the third performance unit 600 and the fourth performance unit 800 at a position corresponding to area E1 at the top of the play area Y, the LED boards 603, 803 are easily blended into the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, a protrusion 3A is provided above the LED boards 603, 803, which protrudes further toward the player than the LED boards 603, 803. Since the protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603, 803 (see Figure 10-23), the LED boards 603, 803 are in the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In addition, while the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 are shown in white, the present invention is not limited to this and they may be dark in color (e.g., black). In this way, the LED boards 603, 803 and base members 601, 801 will blend in more easily with the shadow of the protrusion 3A, making them less noticeable.

In this embodiment, the protrusion 3A protruding toward the player above the LED boards 603 and 803 is used as a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the protrusion is not limited to a protrusion that protrudes from a part of the gaming machine frame 3, but may be, for example, composed of other gaming devices (e.g., winning ball devices, etc.) or presentation devices provided on the gaming board 2 or the gaming area Y. In addition, the protrusion 3A may not only be fixed to the front of the gaming machine frame 3, but may also be a protrusion that protrudes toward the player above the electronic components and specific components by moving from the origin position to the protruding position at a predetermined timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 is formed to overlap front to back with most of the movement area E2 (area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 10-26) when the light-emitting performance section 630 and power transmission member 632 of the third performance unit 600 operating on the rear side of the light guide plate 501 move.

In more detail, the movement area E2 of the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 is the area in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and is an area that includes the origin position and the performance position. When light is incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, the light-emitting area 506 becomes luminous, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 at the rear, the light-emitting performance unit 630, and the power transmission member 632 become difficult or impossible to see through the light guide plate 501 from the player side. That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes a light-emitting performance in which the light guide plate LEDs 502 are turned on and the light-emitting area 506 is illuminated during at least the movement period in which the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the performance position and during the performance period in which they are located at the performance position. This makes it difficult or impossible for the player to see the light-emitting performance unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 through the light guide plate 501, and thus makes it possible to prevent the cable C (electronic component) and the like that is arranged along the power transmission member 632 from being noticeable during the movement period and performance period.

In addition, after the light-emitting performance unit 630 has moved to the performance position, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off and the light-emitting performance of the light-emitting area 506 ends, the power transmission member 632, cable C, etc. become visible, but by turning on the third performance LEDs 604A, 604B of the light-emitting performance unit 630 to make the light-emitting performance unit 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and cable C can be made less noticeable.

Furthermore, electronic components that are arranged to be operable in this manner (for example, the LED board 603 and cable C) may be visible to the player during the waiting period when they are waiting at the origin position or during the movement period, but it is preferable to make them difficult or impossible to see from the player at least during the performance period when they are located at the performance position. In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components from standing out during the performance period when the player is paying attention.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 of the characteristic part 75SG of this embodiment is,
Electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are visible to the player;
A specific member (e.g., base member 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a similar color to the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302, 402, 602, 802) that is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic components and the specific member through the member;
The present invention is characterized by the following:
By doing this, even if the electronic components are arranged so that they are visible to the player, the specific materials of similar colors make the electronic components less noticeable, thereby increasing the freedom of design.
The electronic components and the specific members may be changed to any color as long as they are similar in color, including the electronic components and the specific members having the same color (e.g., black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description of Variations and Applications of Feature 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are provided with light-emitting diodes such as the first performance LED 304, the second performance LEDs 404A-404D, the third performance LED 604A and 604B, and the fourth performance LED 804 as electronic components, but the present invention is not limited to this and includes circuit boards that do not have light-emitting diodes (including the main board 11 that is not used for performance, the performance control board 12, relay boards, etc.), electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, connectors, and cables (wiring), as well as boards and members that secure these.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the specific member is the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, the specific member does not have to be a member constituting part of the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed, but as long as it is a member provided around the electronic component, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (device) in which the electronic component is arranged or housed (for example, a member constituting part of another unit, or a member constituting part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed are exemplified as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member does not have to be a part of the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed as described above, but as long as it is a translucent member that allows the player to see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be a different member provided separately from the unit (apparatus) in which the electronic components are arranged or housed (for example, a member that constitutes part of another unit, or a member that constitutes part of the game board 2 or game machine frame 3).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an example is given in which the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color (same color), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component are the same color as described above, the present invention is not limited to the electronic component and the specific member being the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are partially overlapped on the back side of the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components, and the non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic components and the specific members may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper, lower, left, and right sides without overlapping when viewed from the player's side. Also, as long as the specific members are arranged around the electronic components when viewed from the player's side, the electronic components and the specific members may be arranged apart in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc.

Note that a specific component provided around an electronic component includes a specific component provided in a position that is visible to the player together with the electronic component, and may include, for example, a specific component located within a range of approximately 5 cm away from the electronic component.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 made of a translucent synthetic resin material are used as the translucent member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any material may be used as long as it is a translucent member, and may be glass material, etc. Furthermore, as long as the player can see the electronic components and specific members through the member, it may be transparent or semi-transparent, or may be colored a specified color. Furthermore, the light transmittance does not have to be 100% or a value close to 100%.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as a translucent member is exemplified as a form in which the player can see through the member to see the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as an electronic component and part or all of the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as a specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as at least part of the electronic component is arranged to be visible through the member, it is sufficient that the electronic component and the specific component are arranged to be visible together, even if at least part of the specific component is not arranged to be visible through the member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover member 302, 402, 602, 802 as the translucent member is exemplified as being arranged on the front side of the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific component so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessarily required that the cover member is arranged so as to be aligned with the electronic component and the specific component. In other words, the electronic component and the specific component may be arranged at an angle with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 have an entire surface of a predetermined color (black or white), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the colors of the parts of the electronic components and specific components that can be seen through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic components and specific components) are similar colors, the entire surface does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific components may be colored when the components are molded, or may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be the predetermined color by attaching a sticker or the like.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, an embodiment in which the electronic components and the specific members provided around the electronic components are the same color (same color) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific electronic component (e.g., the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the solenoid 81, etc.) that is provided in a manner that is difficult or impossible for the player to see may be provided separately from the LED board 303, 403, 603, 803 as the electronic component and the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 as the specific member. In a light source having a predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and a predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) provided around the predetermined electronic component, it is preferable that the predetermined electronic component (e.g., first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) is a non-similar color to the predetermined component (e.g., components for fixing first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.).

In this way, for the specified electronic components such as the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the solenoids 81 and 82, which are installed in a way that is difficult or impossible for the player to see, generic products can be used without having to consider the tradeoff with the specified parts that secure them, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, by making the color of the specific component the same hue but with either a higher brightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific component becomes more visible than the electronic component, making it possible to make the electronic component less conspicuous in comparison.

In addition, by coloring the translucent member in a similar color to the electronic components and specific components, the translucent member blends in with the electronic components and specific components, making the electronic components less noticeable.

For example, if an electronic component such as a black LED board is placed on the right side of the game board 2, an outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component can be placed on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, separate from the specific component placed around the electronic component, so that it is visible to the player. This allows the black components to be placed in a balanced manner on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, making it less likely for the player to feel uncomfortable, and making the electronic component less noticeable. In this way, by symmetrically placing components of the same color or a similar color as the electronic component at a distance, separate from the specific component, the electronic component can be made less noticeable.

The configuration related to feature 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations related to feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK, etc. For example, if the effects described in feature 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, 02AK can be executed on image display device 5, the electronic components of first effect unit 300, second effect unit 400, third effect unit 600, and fourth effect unit 800 described in feature 75SG arranged around image display device 5 become less noticeable, making it possible to display the above effects favorably.

Specifically, for example, as described in FIG. 9-9 to FIG. 9-11, when a normal drawing performance NOR is executed during a period other than the performance execution period D0 among the multiple performance execution periods D0 to D4, a light-emitting performance using a first light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs can be executed, and when a specific drawing performance SPE is executed during the performance execution period D2, etc., and a light-emitting performance using a second light-emitting member provided around the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific components (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) (e.g., closer than the game effect lamp 9, etc.) may also be controlled not to be executed (or the light amount may be lower than that of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). In this way, it is possible to prevent the electronic components and specific components from being conspicuous by the execution of a light-emitting performance using the second light-emitting member when the light-emitting performance using the first light-emitting member is restricted.

Furthermore, for light-emitting elements that are not noticeable even when they continue to emit light, such as the second performance LED 404A that can emit surface light from the decorative part 420 of the translucent material that is placed on the front side of the electronic components and specific components among the second light-emitting elements provided around the electronic components and specific components, the amount of light may be maintained (execution is not restricted) even when control is performed so that the light-emitting performance using the first light-emitting element is not executed. In this way, the electronic components and specific components can be made less noticeable without reducing the performance effect too much.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1,75SG001 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, 75SG001, etc.) that can be controlled to put a player into an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and that includes electronic components (e.g., LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) that are arranged so as to be visible to the player, specific members (e.g., base members 301, 401, 601, 801) that are arranged around the electronic components and are formed in the same color as the electronic components, and a member having translucency through which the player can see the electronic components and the specific members. The display device includes a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) that is provided so as to allow a member to be visually recognized, and a display means (e.g., an image display device 5), and the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern 331) that is formed so as to straddle the electronic component (e.g., LED board 303) and the specific member (e.g., base member 301) (see Figs. 10-12), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area that is narrower than the first display area. and a second display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). and in the second display area, a display of an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in the second display area 20SH52 in front of the background image), and in at least the first display area, a display of an announcement that the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded has reached a first predetermined amount can be displayed in front of the background image. and a second notification display notifying that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, an acquired number notification display 20SHKH notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number", such as an acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state has reached "1000", When the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", a winning number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated every time gaming balls are paid out as prize balls in a jackpot gaming state), and the notification display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display). (e.g., the end of the game), the characters used in the notification display are larger than the characters used in the award amount display (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK), the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area).

With this configuration, even if electronic components are placed so that they are visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes them less noticeable, allowing for greater design freedom. Also, displays that include specific characters can be displayed optimally in relation to the background image.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine that looks good while increasing the degree of freedom in design, and the specific characters used to display the amount of granted are updated each time gaming value is granted in an advantageous state, and the background image is not visible from the specific area surrounded by the lines that form the characters, and the characters used to display the notification are larger in size than the characters used to display the amount of granted, and the background image is visible from the specific area, so that the amount of granted is always easy to check despite being small, while the notification can display the fact that a predetermined amount has been reached in large characters without obscuring the background image. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that looks good when installed in an amusement facility, and makes it easy for players to grasp the amount of granted gaming value and recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of gaming machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 In the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, an award amount display relating to the amount of the awarded gaming value can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls, in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of the awarded gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display a prize amount display 20SHK relating to the amount of the awarded gaming value As the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of balls has reached the "kiriban" number, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display ( For example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area, etc.). Below, an example of the form of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

Figure 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S903 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S904 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 14 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 14 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 14 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 15-1 to 15-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period in which the attacker is opened in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 15-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 15-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 15-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state or the time-saving state, etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special pattern stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 15-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 15-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 12, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening count counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 15-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the solenoid drive signal for a specified large prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a specified solenoid circuit, and the large prize opening door solenoid is set to the ON state to open the large prize opening.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 15-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 15-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening, for example by determining whether or not the count switch 23 has been turned on (step 042AKS041). If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning ball count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the big prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042). The CPU 103 then determines whether the updated winning ball count value has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value has not reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then it is determined whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS045), for example, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds. At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the large prize opening process is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 15-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 15-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 15-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening open command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, winning the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 15-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 15-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the post-jackpot opening process of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

When it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described below, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the performance control board 12 side, during the period from the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the performance control board 12 side, when the winning command is received, a series of processes must first be performed, which are to analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period of time is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the process of displaying "0000" as the winning number display may not be able to keep up with the winning number display, and "0015" may not be displayed even if the winning number has been won ("0000" is displayed and then "0015", which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball that is present at the top of the big winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0015" is displayed directly without "0000" being displayed as the winning number display. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when the balls are fired continuously, and even if the period from firing to winning the big winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the big winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winning balls that enter the large prize winning slot from the time the winning number is displayed until the winning number is displayed will be one. Therefore, by increasing the number of winning balls before the winning number display or the number of rounds display is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning number display from increasing at the timing when the round number display begins, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Note that, although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the characteristic section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning slot within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than the number of illuminations during the performance during a big win. In addition, when a game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 15-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the large prize opening before the specified period has elapsed, the number of winnings is increased by "15" in step 042AKS057, and therefore in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display indicating an increase in the number of winnings) is displayed as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in Figure 15-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) (display of "0015") different from the specified display indicating that the number of winnings has not increased in this jackpot (if the jackpot is in a winning streak, a display of "15" added to the number of winnings from the previous jackpot can be displayed after the count-up). On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the big prize winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in the current big win, so as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-22), a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed as a predetermined display (if the winning number is in a consecutive win, the winning number at the time of the previous big win may be displayed as it is). In addition, as the winning number display (predetermined display) indicating that the winning number has not increased, other than "0000", for example, "---" or "not increased" may be displayed as a non-numeric display. In addition, in step 042AKS061, as a big win performance, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a predetermined song or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during the specified period after the big prize opening is opened, i.e., when the winning number display is not being performed, the attacca lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big prize opening. However, when the winning number display is being performed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. Therefore, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the specified period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to enhance the performance after the winning number display after the specified period, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the big prize performance, the performance can be enhanced all at once at the timing when the big prize performance is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not it has received a winning command, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning slot (step 042AKS062). If it has received a winning command, i.e., if there has been a winning in the large winning slot (step 042AKS062; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) before displaying the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that, even if n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and performance examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 15-6 to 15-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the so-called first win (first big win) and not during a consecutive win.

Figure 15-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 15-7 to 15-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 15-6 and 15-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 15-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 15-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 15-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 15-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 15-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 15-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 15-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 15-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 15-7 (a-3) to Fig. 15-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 15-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 15-7 (c-4). Next, as shown in Fig. 15-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 15-7 (c-6), and the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up as shown in Fig. 15-8 (c-7). In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 15-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 15-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 15-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left to the upper left, then the center, then the upper right to the lower right of the pachinko game machine 1, and the performance effect lamps 9 perform a right-hit performance that suggests to the player to hit to the right. In this example, both the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. In addition, the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 15-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display continues on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 15-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-3) to FIG. 15-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) that is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened) can also win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round, if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 15-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), or after time has passed without a prize from the state shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-17), and a predetermined period has passed as shown in FIG. 15-10 (a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big prize performance, as well as to display the number of prizes won, as shown in FIG. 15-6, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed as well as a count-up display as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-20). At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols constituting the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols constituting the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 15-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right as shown in FIG. 15-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-21(A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 15-21(A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 15-21(A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the right back, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 15-21(A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 15-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot is moved toward the right rear, forward, and left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The movement display of the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot and the transition display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image and a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly firing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 15-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 15-12 (c-23). In addition, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 15-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the win), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 15-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again as shown in FIG. 15-6 in response to the second round, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again as shown in FIG. 15-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 15-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating the start of the n+1th round, is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 15-5 is executed, so that the large prize presentation and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed as shown in FIG. 15-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 15-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 15-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 15-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 15-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 15-13 (a-28). In addition, in conjunction with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 15-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 15-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during a specified period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the specified period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 15-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize opening is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 15-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period of time has passed since the large prize opening was completely opened without a game ball winning, as shown in Fig. 15-13 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of winnings won in the first round will continue to be displayed as is, as shown in Fig. 15-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 15-5 that a winning end designation command has been received, a setting is made to end the large prize presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending presentation. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, whereas if a prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won will be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round. Therefore, it is easy to recognize a prize in the large prize slot even from the second round onwards.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 15-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 15-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 15-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, for game balls (fast-hit game balls) that are released by performing a right-hit effect before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if they are above the large prize opening when the opening is opened, they can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the effect control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that were fast-hit from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 15-15, the jackpot game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next jackpot (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winning balls as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 turns on the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 15-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 15-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 turns on the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 15-12(c-23). This causes a specific display to be displayed if a prize is won within the specified period, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 15-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner in which a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during a jackpot performance light up, for example. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 15-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a game medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened during a second or subsequent round of play, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-31), while if a game medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, the presentation control CPU 120 adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to the winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning ball in the large prize opening even in the second or subsequent rounds.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 15-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 15-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a right-hit performance and a fanfare performance before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 15-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-3) to FIG. 15-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the performance effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit attakka lamp 9c is lit, it may be left lit as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a specified period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has passed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in Fig. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

The presentation control CPU 120 also illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 15-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 15-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 15-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 15-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 15-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 15-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and onwards. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and adds excitement to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period, and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the big prize opening, but in addition to this, winnings into the general prize opening 10 during a big win may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a big win, the general prize opening into which the winning ball is entered is the general prize opening 10 located above the variable prize ball device 6B. Figure 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general prize opening 10 during a big win are also counted. Note that explanations of the same parts as in Figure 15-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 15-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 15-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning opening 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 15-19 and Fig. 15-20. Fig. 15-19 and Fig. 15-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 15-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 15-10. As shown in the figure, when the large winning opening is in the open state, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 15-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10 as shown in FIG. 15-19 (b-18A), or if time passes from the state shown in FIG. 15-19 (b-17) without the game ball entering either the large prize opening or the general prize opening 10, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 15-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), if the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10, the state transitions to that shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-20A), (b-20A) and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-20A), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that this is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, the jackpot performance (first round performance) is displayed as shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-20A), which includes the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the message "BOUNUS in progress," and characters. During the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a lighting pattern that is preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 15-20 (a-22A), no count-up display is performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a win has been achieved: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot, the display "BOUNUS in progress" and characters are displayed as the jackpot performance (first round performance), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming medium to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of award related to the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means (e.g., a display of the number of wins). and the like), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened), and if the gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means may be configured to display the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period (for example, displaying "0015" instead of "0000").

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the specified period, the display means may display a count-up indication indicating that the gaming value has been awarded, and then display the specific indication according to the awarded gaming value (for example, displaying a count-up indication as a notification indication that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displaying "0015").

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won is increasing.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, by starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, transmitted from the main board 11).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means may include a path forming means including a first path that leads the gaming medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that leads the gaming medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the gaming medium, and the time that the gaming medium travels from the path forming means to the detection means may be within the specified period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the gaming ball present at the large prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is within the specified period of 0.6 seconds, etc.).

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, after the machine is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display may be displayed to encourage the player to perform an operation (for example, during the period from when a jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened, a right-hit display may be displayed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right, as shown in FIG. 15-7 (a-3)).

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed while in an advantageous state, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state may be a state in which the variable prize door included in the variable prize means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize opening is a state in which the large prize opening is completely open, that is, the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11 in response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from when the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above, if the gaming medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a gaming ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round may win at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the gaming medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above, when the advantageous state ends in a state where a gaming medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state in the last round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state ends with the eleventh gaming ball sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 15-15 in the final round), and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round when the advantageous state is again controlled, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next big win occurs, the gaming ball enters the big win port at the start of the first round, and the number of wins is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the large prize game state has been entered), and when the display of the amount of prize awarded starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening is opened and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game).

This configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize,
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning in the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and when the first of the multiple round games is played, the amount of granted is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (e.g., in the first round, displaying the number of winnings after a predetermined period has elapsed after a large winning opening is opened), and if a gaming medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the gaming value is granted as the amount of granted display after the predetermined period has elapsed. the predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has not won (for example, by displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, by displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and further includes a light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9) and a light-emitting control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means controls the light-emitting means with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game medium winning when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins in a large winning port, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may include a specific light emitting means (such as an attacca lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (such as a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c), and the light emitted by the specific light emitting means when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means may be emitted more times per unit time than the light emitted by the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emitted by the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similarly in step 042AKS064) may be emitted in a manner (a manner in which a win has been notified) that is greater than the light emitted per unit time by the gaming effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above may further include a sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), which outputs a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and which outputs the winning sound both when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means after the specified period has elapsed and when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the specified period has elapsed (for example, when a gaming ball enters a large winning port, the winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the specified period).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a round game that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.) that can be executed a plurality of times, the display means being capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of granted gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and being capable of displaying a round game display that can identify the round game being played (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and displaying a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first of the plurality of round games is played. and when a second or subsequent round game is played among a plurality of round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened). If a gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display). If a gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-31)). When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount of the winning amount according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning may be added to the amount of the winning amount displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if the gaming medium wins in the large winning slot within a predetermined period of time, the number of winning balls awarded in response to the winning may be added to the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (a-30)).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means may be capable of updating the displayed display of the amount of prize awarded in response to a gaming medium winning in the variable prize winning means, and the updating of the display of the amount of prize awarded may be completed once the variable prize winning means changes from the first state to the second state, and before it returns to the first state (for example, the count-up display and the display of the number of prizes won corresponding to the over prize may be completed within the period from when the large prize winning port is completely closed to when it becomes an open state corresponding to the second round).

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, The display means is capable of displaying a grant amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of the gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (for example, by displaying the number of wins), and when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, displays the grant amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, displays the number of wins after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win at the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displays the grant amount display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been granted after the predetermined period has elapsed. a predetermined display (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and the game machine further comprises a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, performance effect lamps 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means is more likely to display a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed than a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that it controls the light-emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the period has elapsed (for example, during a specified period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, as shown in Figure 15-10 (c-18), but when the number of winnings is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in Figures 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and more performance effect lamps 9 are emitted than during the specified period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of prizes is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for encouraging the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, by displaying a right-hit display), and the light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light-emitting means other than the specific light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, if the award amount display before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the predetermined light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed. When the special light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are illuminated in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 15-7 (c-3) to FIG. 15-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit up attacca lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 15-9 (c-15) and remains lit).

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round of play may be terminated when a specific number of gaming media are won, and transition to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 gaming balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the lapse of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state may be a sufficient time for the gaming media to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened may be a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of the specified period for 10 gaming balls to win).

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one round of play ends when a specific number of game balls are won, and transitions to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 game balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the end of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state is sufficient for the game media to win the specific number of game balls (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened is sufficient for 10 game balls to win, even if counted from the end of the specified period), and the variable prize winning When the means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted if the display of the amount of the award before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light only after the display of the amount of the award after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 15-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 may not be illuminated until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes is displayed, and as shown in Figs. 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be illuminated only after the display of the number of prizes after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a mid-round effect corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display, a number of wins display, and a jackpot mid-play effect can be executed after the specified period has elapsed), and the light-emitting means may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the mid-round effect (for example, as shown in Figures 15-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot mid-play effect).

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (e.g., a general winning port 10, etc.) through which a gaming medium can win a prize is further provided, and the display means is capable of displaying the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (e.g., displaying an acquisition number display in response to a winning in the general winning port 10, etc.), and if the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (e.g., If no game balls enter the general winning opening 10 during a fixed period, a predetermined display of "0000" may be displayed to indicate that no prize balls have been awarded), and if a game medium enters the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means may be displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 10 during a specified period after the large winning opening is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, a display of "0003" may be displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10).

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be provided in the game area on the right side), the display means may display a first image (for example, a decorative symbol constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize, and the first image may be displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative symbol constituting a jackpot), and the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative symbol constituting a jackpot to the rear right, front, and rear left, suggesting a right hit).

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 16-1 to 16-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state and an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to the First Aspect of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the background art related to the first aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, it may display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 16-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 16-1(A), the acquisition number display shows "120 points" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The winning number display uses numbers to show the number of winning balls, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number display. The numbers used to display the winning number are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The winning number display shown in Figure 16-1 (A) uses the word "points" to make it clear that it is a winning number display, and the number "120" to show the number of winning balls.

Some of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions form a special area. Here, a special area is an area that is surrounded by the lines that form the character, and does not connect to the area outside the lines that form the character. Here, "not connecting to the area outside the lines that form the character" includes cases where the "special area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", and cases where the "special area" is not completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", but appears to be a separate area at first glance. In the following explanation, characters that form a special area are referred to as "special characters".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is an approximately circular region surrounded by the curves that form the character. In the case of the Arabic numeral "8", two specific regions are formed. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by the three straight lines that form the character.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 16-1(A), a jackpot background image relating to the jackpot gaming state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 16-1(A), a jackpot background image of a flying butterfly is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed behind other images displayed on the image display device in the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot background image contains many lines that represent animated pictures and effects.

The number of wins display is displayed small in an edge area of the display area of the image display device that does not impede the visibility of the background image during a jackpot. When the background image during a jackpot changes over time, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may overlap the back of the number of wins display. If a specific character is displayed in the number of wins display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 16-1 (A), when the lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear as a different character than it actually is.

Figure 16-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 16-1 (A). In the example shown in Figures 16-1 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, and the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," making the specific character "0" look like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0."

In this way, if the characters showing the number of balls won are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the number of balls awarded during a jackpot game cannot be accurately recognized. However, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines included in the background image during a jackpot so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The first form of characteristic part 20SH was created in consideration of this background. The first form of characteristic part 20SH is described below.

(Display of Acquisition Number in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific regions 20SHI1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", are displayed in a non-transparent display mode that differs from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 16-2(A), the color of the lines 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific regions 20SHI1 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are displayed in "white".

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of balls won, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that the number of balls won is displayed, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 16-2 (A).

(Display of Acquisition Number in the First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display to notify the player of this fact.

Here, the time-saving control and the probability variable control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are ended when a predetermined number of special game games are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before a predetermined number of special game games are played. However, for example, the number of time-saving control and the probability variable control may be different for each type of jackpot, and in the case of a specific type of jackpot, the high probability control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state may be continuously executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, resulting in a so-called consecutive state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive win state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive win state reaches a predetermined number, a winning number notification display is displayed to notify that fact.

The winning number notification display uses numbers to display the predetermined number of balls awarded during a jackpot game state when that number is reached, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number notification display. The numbers used in the winning number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the acquisition number notification display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 16-2(B), the specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 16-2(B), the specific regions 20SHI2 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used in the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying a predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state is reached, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that it is a winning number notification display, are displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 16-2 (B).

(Appearance of Acquisition Number Display in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
Fig. 16-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 16-3(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 16-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 16-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the background image during a jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the number of wins display 20SHK, but because specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white," the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during a jackpot does not blend in with the line 20SHS1 that forms the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the number of winnings display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot display 20SHO to let the player know that it is in a jackpot game state, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ that shows the confirmed decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination that is derived and displayed when it is in a jackpot game state, a round number display 20SHR that shows the number of rounds in the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right hit display 20SHM that suggests to the player that he should hit to the right. Like the number of winnings display 20SHK, the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM are also displayed small in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot.

The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM may include characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 16-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji", which are characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Also, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The round number display 20SHR uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and "alphabet", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The right-hand hit display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Some of the characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific areas of the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are non-transparent, just like the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of wins display 20SHK, and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS1 that forms the characters, so the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of the performance of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 16-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52, which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and various displays are performed by distinguishing between them. In the example shown in FIG. 16-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 16-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image during a jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an acquisition number display 20SHK in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Also, as shown in FIG. 16-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative pattern display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 16-4(A), the number of points won 20SHK is displayed, indicating "990 points," so it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the big win game state. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number in the number of points won 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the big win game state.

In this situation, suppose a gaming ball enters the big prize slot and 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the dispensing of 15 game balls, the performance control CPU 120 counts up the number of winning balls display 20SHK by one from "990" to "1005", as shown in Figures 16-4 (B) to (G). In this case, the number of winning balls display 20SHK will go through the round number "1000", which is a so-called "kiriban". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000 balls".

Here, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display each time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 2000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000".

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches the round number "1000", the performance control CPU 120 displays a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH on the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (D). Then, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, which is displayed in each frame of the image while the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005", from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005", the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (G). In this case, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By this type of display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 16-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 toward the left edge of the display area.

By this display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display ends when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 may determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches a "round number" and that a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been displayed, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing. The performance control CPU 120 may also determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing.

As mentioned above, the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in Figures 16-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the example shown in Figures 16-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

In addition, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 16-4 (D) to (H).

The presentation mode when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the presentation mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the presentation in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to jump out from the back side of the screen to the front side, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to gradually emerge, or a character may appear and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame out, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to gradually disappear, or when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines, the character may be made to leave.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round number" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK do not allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area.

With this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH, which include the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the actual characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Also, unlike the winning number display 20SHK, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not constantly displayed during a jackpot game state, but is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches a "round number." Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during a jackpot visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during a jackpot in the prominent display position of the first display area.

As mentioned above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

This configuration allows the number of wins display 20SHK and the number of wins notification display 20SHKH, which use Arabic numerals, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot.

Also, as described above, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, it displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

With this configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately ascertained from the winning number display 20SHK.

As described above, the image display device 5 can also display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

This configuration makes the winning number notification display 20SHKH easier for the player to see, and can conveniently notify the player that the number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game has reached the "kiriban" number.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character. Furthermore, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hand hit display 20SHM cannot be seen from the specific area in the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 16-5 to Fig. 16-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ratio of the size of the specific region of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the region of the lines forming the characters is smaller than that of the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of Acquisition Number in Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the winning number notification. Here, three-dimensional characters are a character format that makes the characters appear to jump out in front of the player. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and an area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 16-5(A), the specific regions 20SHI3 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the number of wins notification, which correspond to specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 16-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the size of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the characters, which is located on the inner side of the area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16-6(A) is a diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-6(A), the specific region 20SHI4 for the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9" among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used in the winning number notification display is displayed in "white," and when it is displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in Modification Example 1)
FIG. 16-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first modified example.

In the first modified example, when comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the non-three-dimensional specific characters, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific characters, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions are smaller in size than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SH32 that represents the depth of the character and is located on the inner side of the area 20SH31 that represents the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the character is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 16-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 16-7(A), the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area that forms the characters, and are displayed in one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations of the three-color gradation.

The line region forming the character in display mode A is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "red," the central region 20SHSC being "orange," and the lower region 20SHSD being "yellow." The line region forming the character in display mode B is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "orange," the central region 20SHSC being "yellow," and the lower region 20SHSD being "green." The line region forming the character in display mode C is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "yellow," the central region 20SHSC being "green," and the lower region 20SHSD being "light blue." The line region forming the character in display mode D is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "green," the central region 20SHSC being "light blue," and the lower region 20SHSD being "blue." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode E is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "light blue," the center area 20SHSC being "blue," and the lower area 20SHSD being "purple." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode F is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "blue," the center area 20SHSC being "purple," and the lower area 20SHSD being "red." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode G is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "purple," the center area 20SHSC being "red," and the lower area 20SHSD being "yellow."

The image display device 5 changes the style of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions notification over time in the following order: Display style A → Display style B → Display style C → Display style D → Display style E → Display style F → Display style G → Display style A → ....

Figure 16-7 (B) shows an example of the color change that accompanies the operation of the acquisition number notification display in variant 2.

In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (B), the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

In the example shown in FIG. 16-7(B), the acquisition number notification display changes from display mode A to display mode D while moving (frame-in) from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. The acquisition number display then changes from display mode D to display mode G while stopped and displayed for 1 second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The acquisition number notification display then changes from display mode G to display mode C while moving (frame-out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left edge of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls" as an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "kiriban", and can display an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings notification have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used to display the number of winnings.

With this configuration, the winning number display and winning number notification display, including the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

The characters used to display the number of wins are three-dimensional characters. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the winning number notification display.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 along with the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number. Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the size of the line areas 20SHS21, 20SHS22 that form the letters is small, not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters be reduced, but also the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image during a jackpot visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification in variant 1 are not visible from specific area 20SHI4 against the background image during a jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image during a jackpot not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to prevent the letters from being misinterpreted.

As described above, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 are displayed with a three-color gradation in the line areas that form the characters. The image display device 5 changes the appearance of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display over time in the following order: Display appearance A → Display appearance B → Display appearance C → Display appearance D → Display appearance E → Display appearance F → Display appearance G → Display appearance A → ... The speed at which the display appearance of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the acquisition number notification display, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Explanation of the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 16-8 to Fig. 16-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific characters used in the result display are visible in a specific area of the ending background image.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used in results display)
FIG. 16-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for displaying the result in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 finishes the final round of play, it executes an ending presentation corresponding to the end of the jackpot play state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays an ending background video. In addition, while the image display device 5 is displaying the ending background video, it displays a result display announcing the total number of winning balls awarded in the jackpot play state.

The result display uses numbers to show the total number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a result display. The numbers used to display the result are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the result display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 16-8, the specific regions of the specific characters used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 16-8, the specific regions 20SHI5 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used to display the results, numbers other than Arabic numerals to indicate the total number of winning balls awarded in a jackpot game state, and characters other than numerals to recognize that it is a result display, are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 16-8.

(Various effects during big win game mode)
Fig. 16-9 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation period of various presentations in a big win gaming state. Fig. 16-10 is a diagram showing an example of presentation operation of various presentations in a big win gaming state.

When reserved information is stored in a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a reserved consecutive win notification that indicates that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in accordance with the reserved information stored. For example, in a jackpot game state of 10 rounds in total, the presentation control CPU 120 starts a reserved consecutive win notification at timing T1 when 9 rounds of round play end and the 10th round, which is the final round, begins, as shown in Figures 16-9 and 16-10 (A) to (B).

When the reserved consecutive wins notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 16-10(B), the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays an effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification in front of the jackpot background image, which corresponds to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. In the example shown in FIG. 16-10(B), a "flame" effect image 20SHE is displayed as the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification.

In the example shown in Figure 16-10 (B), the "flame" lines of the effect image overlap the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, but because the specific area is displayed in "white," the effect image cannot be seen from the specific area. Therefore, in the specific area, the "flame" lines of the effect image do not blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

As shown in Figure 16-9 and Figure 16-10 (B) to (C), at the timing T2 when the final round of play ends and the ending performance begins, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive win notification and begins the ending performance. When the ending performance begins, the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 begins displaying an ending background video at a specified brightness. In the example shown in Figure 16-10 (C), an ending background video of cherry blossom petals falling from the back of the screen is displayed in the first display area 20SH51. Also, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in front of the ending background video to indicate that the jackpot play state has ended.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive wins notification before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is being displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is displayed when the ending background video is not being displayed.

The ending background video only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in FIG. 16-10(D). In the example shown in FIG. 16-10(D), cherry blossom petals are displayed as the ending background video and flutter across the entire screen.

As shown in Figure 16-9 and Figures 16-10 (D) to (E), at time T3 when the result display begins, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the brightness of the ending background video to a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, pauses the progression of the ending background video, and displays it as a still image. The performance control CPU 120 then displays the result display 20SHRE in front of the ending background video at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background video. In the example shown in Figure 16-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossoms stop, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed in a transparent manner in the specific area 20SHI5. Therefore, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE and the ending background video can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 16-10 (A), (B), and (E). The result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in Figure 16-10 (E).

(The setting is hinted at in the ending background video)
FIG. 16-11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation using an ending background video.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is also configured to be able to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of cherry blossom snow falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 16-11 (A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of large amounts of cherry blossom snow falling from cherry trees in full bloom on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 16-11 (B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is set to low or high. For example, when the setting value is set to low, the ending background video shown in FIG. 16-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is set to high, the ending background video shown in FIG. 16-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is "6," which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the aforementioned consecutive wins in the reserved lottery prediction is one of several types of prediction effects that predict the probability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect based on the consecutive wins in the reserved lottery prediction is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state in at least the first display area 20SH51. In addition, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 can display an effect image 20SHE of a reserved consecutive ball announcement, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the stored reserved information, in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 can display a result display 20SHRE, which notifies the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpot game state, in front of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK cannot be seen from the specific area, and the background video during a jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice cannot be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5, where the ending background video can be seen.

According to this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the ending background image. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52 and may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve. If the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending consecutive win notice. Therefore, by making the ending background image visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the ending background image in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of multiple setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display an ending background image in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set. The effect image 20SHRE of the reserved consecutive win notification is one of multiple types of notification effects that predict the jackpot reliability, but does not execute a setting suggestion effect based on the reserved consecutive win notification.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be executed using the ending background video, which increases the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE.

As described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when the image display device 5 starts displaying the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result display 20SHRE at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness.

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 16-12 to 16-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, a remaining number display relating to the remaining number of ST times in a probability variable state and a remaining number notification display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the remaining number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during ST. The specific characters used in the remaining number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during ST.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 16-12 is a diagram showing background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

Pachinko gaming machines are basically designed so that when comparing advantageous states for the player, such as a special state, time-saving state, or jackpot gaming state, with the normal state, the period during which the player plays in the advantageous state is longer than the period during which the player plays in the normal state.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when the upper limit number of reserved information is stored, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, a shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed than when the upper limit number of reserved information is not stored. And in a special state with time-saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to an open state, making it easier for winning to occur than in the normal state, so shortened variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and it is possible to progress the game faster than in the normal state. Therefore, the period during which play is performed in the normal state is longer than the period during which play is performed in a special state with time-saving control.

The probability variable control ends when either of the following conditions is met first after the end of the jackpot game state: a specified number of STs of special game are played, or the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become "jackpot" while the probability variable control is being performed, if the specified number of STs of special game are played, the probability variable control ends. The specified number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the variable display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving control ends when either of the following conditions is met first: the special pattern game is played a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the special pattern game has been played a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is, for example, 70 times.

The set value for the number of STs and the set value for the number of time-savings may be different values.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a high probability state, it may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 16-12(A). In the example shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the remaining number display shows "30 times remaining" corresponding to the fact that there are 30 ST times remaining.

The remaining number of times display uses numbers to show the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 16-12 (A) uses the characters "remaining" and "times" to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display, and the number "30" to show the remaining number of ST times.

Some characters used to display the remaining number of times also form special regions.

When the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the ST background image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 16-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image that is displayed behind the other images displayed on the image display device in the high probability state. The ST background image contains many lines that represent animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed small in an edge area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the background image during ST changes over time, the lines of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number of times display. Furthermore, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining number of times display, as in the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 16-12 (A), if the lines of the image during ST overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during ST may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear as a different character from its original character.

Figure 16-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 16-12 (A). In the example shown in Figures 16-12 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of plays, and the lines of the background image during ST are assimilated with the lines that form the specific character "0", so that the specific character "0" appears as the Arabic numeral "8" rather than the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters showing the remaining number of times are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the remaining number of ST times in the special probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines in the background image during ST so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The fourth form of characteristic part 20SH was made in consideration of this background, and the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 16-13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific region 20SHI6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 16-13, the color of the lines 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific region 20SHI6 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character to the extent that the specific region 20SHI6 and the lines 20SHS6 that form the character can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that they are displaying the remaining number of times, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 16-13.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 16-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display to notify the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display uses numbers to display the specified number of remaining times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a specified number, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. The numbers used in the remaining number of times notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in multiple types with different transparency, as shown in FIG. 16-14. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 16-14(A) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are not transparent, and the background of the characters is not visible through the line areas. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 16-14(B) is a display type in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are transparent, and the background of the characters is visible through the line areas.

The remaining number of times notification is also displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional characters includes area 20SHS71 representing the characters and area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is visible through, area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed through transparency, so that the area that was displayed as area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters in a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible is displayed as area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 16-14, the specific regions 20SHI7 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of plays, which correspond to the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when they are displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 16-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number of times display differs when the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner and when it is displayed in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 16-14, the remaining number of times display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters located on the inner side of that becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 16-14(B), the remaining number of times display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters is displayed transparently, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B that represents the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of remaining number display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 16-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display appears in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 16-15(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 16-15(A).

In the example shown in Figures 16-15 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but because specific area 20SHI6 is displayed in "white," the background image during ST cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI6, it does not blend in with the lines 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU to notify the player that they are in a probability of winning state. Like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative patterns in the display area of the image display device 5.

The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability variable display 20SHRU may include characters of the same type as those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display. In this embodiment, the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are "numbers," "hiragana," and "kanji," as shown in Figures 16-17. On the other hand, the probability variable display 20SHRU uses "alphabet," which is a different type of character than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH. The number of wins display 20SHK uses "numbers," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "katakana," which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH. The right-hit display 20SHM uses "hiragana" and "kanji," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "symbols," which are a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH.

Some characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU, like the specific region 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, are non-transparent and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS6 that forms the characters, so the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

(Example of the remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 16-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 16-17 is a diagram showing an example of the remaining number display and the performance operation of the remaining number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

As shown in Figure 16-17, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 16-17 (A) to (B), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number indicating the remaining number of STs in the remaining number of times display 20SHST each time a variable display is executed.

As shown in Figures 16-16 and 16-17 (A) to (B), when the variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the predetermined number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. For example, when the variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, or 10, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in Figures 16-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In the example shown in FIG. 16-17, when the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of times of winning display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the number of times of winning display 20SHK is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-16 and FIG. 16-17(B) to (C), when a first period has elapsed since the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was started, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-16 and FIG. 16-17(B) to (E), when a second period has elapsed since the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was changed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on multiple types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the user of a specified number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a specified number. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed across multiple variable displays, the user may misinterpret the remaining number of ST times.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the total period of the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode and the second period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 16-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, regardless of the type of variable display based on the change pattern, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in that one variable display.

Here, the first display region 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left," "middle," and "right" described above. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display region 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

In this embodiment, therefore, in order to allow the display result of the variable display to be recognized, the first period during which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode is set to end before the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time is derived.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 16-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number, the display result of the variable display can be appropriately recognized regardless of the type of variable display based on the variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-17(D), the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but since the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH has changed to a transparent display mode, the identification information in the background of the characters can be seen from the area of the lines that form the characters of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times indicator 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than in a normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes a predetermined number, on the front side of the background image during ST. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50, as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50. The remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are not visible from the specific area 20SHI6 against the background image during ST. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 against the background image during ST.

With this configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, which include specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining number of STs in a probability variable state, the player checks the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear to be different characters from the original characters. However, by making the background image during ST invisible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Furthermore, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not displayed at all times like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST has reached a specified number, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during ST in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back is visible through the lines that form the characters.

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

As described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

This configuration allows the player to see the variable display of the decorative symbols while the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

Also, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode.

With this configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded. The image display device 5 then displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed.

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the number of wins display 20SHK from being reduced due to the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH being displayed.

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine capable of playing a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 20SH)
(1) A gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and the like), and in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted in a jackpot gaming state As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SH the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK), the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area).

According to this configuration, the given amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state, the player checks the given amount display, but the given amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the notification display is not displayed at all times in the advantageous state like the given amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9").

This configuration allows the display of the amount of the grant and the notification using Arabic numerals to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means may display the notification display when the award amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 may display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed).

With this configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded during the jackpot gaming state can be accurately ascertained from the award amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (3), the display means may be capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the winning number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

This configuration makes the notification display more noticeable to the player, and can conveniently notify the player that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display relating to the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the characters used in the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, a jackpot display The characters used in the display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of different types from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the specific characters used in the specific displays are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area during a jackpot, etc.).

This configuration allows specific characters to be accurately recognized even in specific displays.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, and the like), in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an awarded amount display relating to the awarded amount of gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded, and the like), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, a first alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount, as alert displays notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number alert display notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number" number, as alert displays notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a round number). When the number of prize balls awarded in the advantageous state reaches "1000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed), the acquisition amount display is updated every time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display is updated every time gaming balls are paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition number display). The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the award amount display (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the acquisition number display).

With this configuration, the award amount display and notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the award amount display, but the award amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used in the notification display may be three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used in the winning number notification display may be three-dimensional characters), and the line area forming the three-dimensional characters may include an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the dramatic effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 during a jackpot).

With this configuration, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the awarded amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific letters be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific letters.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display in variant 1 may be such that the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI4).

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, the letters can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means may be capable of changing the state of the notification display to a specific state (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period of time has elapsed since the state of the notification display changed to the specific state, the state of the notification display may be changed to a state different from the specific state (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be framed out, etc.).

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used in the notification display are displayed in a plurality of different colors in the line areas forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant 2 relating to the second form of characteristic part 20SH are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line areas forming the characters), and the display means is capable of changing the combination of the plurality of colors over time (for example, the image display device 5 changes the form of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in the following order: Display form A → Display form B → Display form C → Display form D → Display form E → Display form F). The display may be changed over time in the order of display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → ...), and the speed at which the combination of the multiple types of colors changes when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode may be different from when it is displayed in a mode other than the specific mode (for example, the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes may be different when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out)).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the notification display, enhancing the dramatic effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a probability variable state with time-saving control in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the special state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is equipped with a first display area 20SH5 In the second display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during ST can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation count display relating to the number of variations in the special state can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as a number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a predetermined value, a first number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a first predetermined value, and a second number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51, When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches a predetermined number, a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies the predetermined number of times can be displayed, such as a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50), the variable number of times display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed), the number of times display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display), and characters used for the number of times display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the variable number of times display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is The characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), the characters used for the variable number of times display and the number of times notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), the specific characters used for the variable number of times display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6, etc.), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are such that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7, etc.).

According to this configuration, the change count display and the number of times notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the change count in a special state, the change count display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the number of times notification display is not displayed at all times like the change count display, but is displayed only for a specific period in order to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the change count display is a specified number, and since it is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display in a transparent manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters (for example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters).

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the count notification display is displayed, preventing unnecessary stress from being caused to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right"), and the display means is capable of displaying the number of times notification display in front of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in front of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).

With this configuration, the variable display of the identification information can be seen while the count notification display is being displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent manner (for example, when the display result of the variable display is displayed in a derived manner, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner, etc.).

With this configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the count notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK that indicates the number of prize balls that have been awarded), and displays the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area in which the amount of the award display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the dispensed amount display from decreasing due to the number of times the notification display is displayed.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is , a first display area 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a first background video corresponding to the progress of the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 displays, in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during a jackpot corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending, etc.), at least in the first display area, a second background image corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background image corresponding to the fact that the jackpot gaming state is ending, at least in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the second background image is not being displayed, in the second display area, a specific suggestion image giving a suggestion regarding the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background image (for example, when the ending background image is not being displayed, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive win notice in a reserve that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored, on the front side of the background image during a jackpot, in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an amount of value awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, in front of the second background image, a result notification display that notifies the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when an ending background image is displayed), and characters used in the result notification display are characters of a larger size than characters used in the amount of value awarded display (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the first background image and the previous specific suggestion image are not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice are not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to this configuration, the display of the amount of the game value provided including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the display of the result notification including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the second background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of the game value provided in an advantageous state, the display of the amount of the game value provided checks the display of the amount of the game value provided. However, since the display of the amount of the game value provided is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area and may overlap with the specific suggestion image, if the first background image or the specific suggestion image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, since the display of the result is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, it is possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) The gaming machine of (17) above is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying the second background video in a manner suggesting the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is one of a plurality of suggestion videos that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the consecutive wins in reserve is one of a plurality of preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect due to the consecutive wins in reserve is not executed, etc.).

With this configuration, the second background image may suggest a setting value, which increases the significance of the second background image being visible from a specific area of the specific characters used to display the result notification.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background video at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness, etc.), and at the timing when the display of the result notification display starts, the second background video is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the result notification display is displayed at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result notification display at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness, at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE starts).

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 19SH will be described with reference to Figs. 17-1 to 17-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the big prize opening in a big win gaming state, and an expected acquisition number display relating to the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the big win gaming state. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the expected acquisition number display invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 19SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Presentation action when a win occurs during a round of play)
Fig. 17-1 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when a win occurs during a round of play, and Fig. 17-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in Fig. 17-1 (A), when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it displays, as the winning number display 20SHK, a winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters a big prize opening in the jackpot gaming state, and a planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in Fig. 17-1 (A), the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the form of a fraction, such as "135/1500," with the winning number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator and the planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator, separated by a central dividing line "/." In other words, the winning number display 20SHK shown in Figure 17-1 (A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball entered the big prize opening during a big win game state was 135 balls, and that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded during a big win game state is 1,500 balls.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings display 20SHK is also displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, which also displays the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a background image during a jackpot, in which the character 20SHCA appears, in response to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during a jackpot is displayed on a display layer that is arranged behind the display layer in which the number of winnings display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17-2.

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK according to the presentation mode shown in Figures 17-1 (B) to (F).

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in a display area close to the position of the special variable prize ball device 7 that forms the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (B). Here, in this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, the special variable prize ball device 7 is located in the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen by the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 17-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF that imitates a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the number of winnings display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (C). In the example shown in FIG. 17-1 (C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 17-1 (C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17-2. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 17-2 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 17-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 17-1 (D) to (E) and 17-2 (D) to (E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the example shown in Figures 17-1 (D) to (E) and 17-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 17-1 (F), the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, making the acquisition number display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1, which was the focus of attention, has been updated.

(Example of the performance when an over-winning occurs)
Fig. 17-3 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs Fig. 17-4 is a diagram showing an example of a positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening during one round of play, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, a so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. When an over-winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in a presentation mode as shown in FIG. 17-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms the large winning opening, as shown in Figures 17-3 (A) to (B), in the same way as when up to the 10th winning occurs. In the example shown in Figure 17-3 (B), an effect display 20SHEF that resembles a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the winning number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the winning number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 17-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 17-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation also starts an over-winning presentation to notify the user that an over-winning has occurred before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the winning number display 20SHK, in other words, before the effect display 20SHEF makes the winning number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, as shown in FIG. 17-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(C), an over-winning presentation video featuring the character CHCB is displayed on the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as the over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 17-3(C), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an over winning sound from speakers 8L and 8R that is different from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance. In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(C), the over winning sound "beep beep beep" is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can also light up the attacca lamp 9c in a different light emission mode from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 17-3 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17-4. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 17-4 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF up to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 17-3(D)-(E) and 17-4(D)-(E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. In the example shown in Figures 17-3(D)-(E) and 17-4(D)-(E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 17-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(F), the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition count display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the values of the acquisition count display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition count display 20SHK2 have been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which were the focus of attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are updated, so that the player can easily recognize that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state has increased by the number of prize balls awarded due to the over-winning.

After the effect display 20SHEF has ended, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation, as shown in FIG. 17-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 17-3(G), the over prize presentation image that was displayed on the image display device 5 as the over prize presentation ends, and the background image during the jackpot, in which the character 20SHCA appears, is displayed.

(Setting suggested by over-winning effect)
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the values increase in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the values increase in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over winning effect can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCB on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 17-5 (A), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCC on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 17-5 (B), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The setting suggestion effect using the over winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is a low setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 17-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is a high setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 17-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is "6", which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

(If there are rounds where the required number of prizes are not awarded and rounds where over-winning occurs)
FIG. 16-6 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation in a case where there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game state remains open until either a specified period of time has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a specified number, whichever comes first.

In the example shown in Figures 17-6 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during the first round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-6 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 17-6 (C).

Let us now assume that an over win occurs during three rounds of play. In this case, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF begins, and the over win performance is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

As shown in FIG. 17-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 17-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 17-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 17-6 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but because over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the final value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, because there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to this embodiment, if there are rounds in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurs, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 will be less than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2, so by checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there were rounds in which the specified number of winning balls was not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurred.

Figure 16-7 shows another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and an over-winning ball occurs in characteristic part 19SH.

In the example shown in Figures 17-7 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 17-7 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big prize play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 17-7 (C).

And let us say that an over win occurs during the 3rd round of play. In that case, as shown in FIG. 17-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF starts, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over win performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 17-7(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but while the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. As shown in FIG. 17-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains at "1500".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 17-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 17-7 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but although over-winning has occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the value of the final expected number of winning balls display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the value of the final number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs, it is possible to prevent any sense of incongruity caused by the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty winning a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a CPU 103 that can execute a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a presentation control CPU 120 that can execute an over-winning presentation when an over-winning occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK1, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and the expected winning number display 20SHK2, which indicates the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display 20SHEF, which makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, when an over-winning occurs. The image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, compared to when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains visible.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can execute over-winning performances using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the over-winning effect.

As described above, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of balls won display 20SHK1 and the number of balls expected to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

With this configuration, the entry of the gaming ball into the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by a display effect on the image display device 5, which can increase interest. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes it difficult or impossible to see not only the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 but also the number of wins display 20SHK1, so the feeling of discomfort can be more effectively suppressed.

As described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view, so that attention to the effect display 20SHEF can also draw attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in their state before the values were updated.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the over-winning presentation before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, the over-winning effect can be executed to let the player know in advance that an over-winning has occurred, so it is possible to more effectively prevent a sense of discomfort from arising when the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 is updated.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of several different setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can then execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set.

This configuration can increase attention to the over-winning effects.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended.

With this configuration, the updated value of the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning effect is continuing, so the sense of discomfort caused by the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Modifications of Characteristic Part 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes a process for when the power supply is stopped just before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this process for when the power supply is stopped, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a process for protecting the data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code and a process for backing up various data. The data that is backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, by executing such a process for when the power supply is stopped, the CPU 103 can continue playing the game before the power outage after the power is restored.

On the other hand, the presentation control CPU 120 does not back up the various data required to proceed with the presentation. Therefore, after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot continue the presentation based on the game information before the power outage.

For example, if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during a round of play due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the presentation control CPU 120 will not execute a presentation corresponding to the round of play after the power outage is restored. In that case, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 during the round of play after the power outage is restored, or will display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 in a manner that does not display specific values such as "???/????". Furthermore, even if a win occurs during a round of play after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 has not executed a presentation corresponding to the round of play. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred in one round of play after the power outage is restored, it will not execute the over win performance using the image display device 5, but can execute the over win performance using the speakers 8L, 8R and the attacca lamp 9c. Note that the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred, for example, by a performance control command that notifies the player that an over win has occurred.

With this configuration, in a situation where the values of the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed to avoid any sense of incongruity, while if an over-winning occurs, this fact can be notified.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means that can be changed between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball is easy to win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball is impossible or difficult to win a prize, etc.), and a lane that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then changes the variable winning means to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. The game machine is provided with a control means capable of executing a round game (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed back to the closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state), a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media win in the variable winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in one of the round games), and the display means displays the awarded game value awarded when the game media win in the variable winning means. and a second award amount display relating to the amount of gaming value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an expected number of awards display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot gaming state), and can display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see when more than the predetermined number of gaming media have won in the variable winning means (for example, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the expected number of awards display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs). the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see), and the specific performance execution means starts the specific performance before the second award amount display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the specific display (the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see),

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may occur when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated, compared to when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated while the second amount of provision display remains visible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, a sound output means is provided (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an effect by the display means and an effect by the sound output means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing, as an over winning effect, an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.).

This configuration can enhance the effect of specific performances.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means, and moves the specific display to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, when the gaming ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

With this configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be expressed by a display effect on the display means, which can increase interest. In addition, the specific display makes it impossible or difficult to see not only the second award amount display but also the first award amount display, so that the occurrence of a sense of incongruity can be more effectively suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first and second award amount displays are visible when the specific display is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the specific display reaches the display area in which the first and second award amount displays are displayed (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

With this configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area in which the first and second grant amount displays are displayed, the first and second grant amount displays automatically come into view, so that attention to the specific display can also draw attention to the first and second grant amount displays before their values were updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect before the specific display reaches the display area where the first award amount display and the second award amount display are displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 are displayed).

With this configuration, the player can recognize in advance that a specific presentation has been executed and that more than a predetermined number of gaming media have been won into the variable winning means, which more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the second award amount display is updated.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a manner that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (e.g., the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set setting value, etc.).

This configuration can increase attention to specific performances.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect execution means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display has ended (for example, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, etc.).

With this configuration, the updated value of the second award amount display becomes visible while the specific performance is continuing, so that the sense of discomfort caused by the second award amount display being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Other examples of transition to time-saving mode)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state is always made via the big win state or the small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols, such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values. However, the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be the timing of the winning entry into the starting hole, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number will be the winning value; if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value will be the winning value; if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value will be the winning value; and in the case of a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area is set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area will be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the number of times the time-saving state is displayed will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing for determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be any time after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state or when the probability is high, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the game is already in the time-saving state, it may be possible to either reset the number of times the time-saving symbol is played or not draw a lottery, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be a number of times that is determined in advance depending on the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

Also, a lottery may be carried out to determine the symbol for the end of the time-saving period, and the number of times the time-saving period is to be repeated may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the symbol for the end of the time-saving period is derived and displayed, or until the symbol for the big win is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving period is to be repeated may not be set, and may in principle be unlimited.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a prescribed number of variable displays after a jackpot, the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after a prescribed number of variable displays have been executed, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a different time from the pattern confirmation times for other patterns.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 75SG001 Pachinko gaming machine 300 First performance unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decorative pattern 400 Second performance unit 401 Base member 402 Cover member 403 LED board 420 Decorative part 600 Third performance unit 800 Fourth performance unit 801 Base member 802 Cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A specific member;
An electronic component provided on a front side of the specific member;
a light-transmitting member that transmits light and covers a front side of the electronic component;
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
Equipped with
The electronic component and the specific member are formed to be visible to a player through the translucent member,
The display means includes:
When the game is controlled to be in the advantageous state, a background display relating to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The indication of the amount of the provided liquid is a display that continues to be displayed even after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
the notification display is a display that ends when the specific period has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the indication of the amount of the imparted item is not changed during display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display,
the background display is not visible from the specific region of the specific character display included in the imparting amount display,
When a display position of a specific character display included in the notification display is changed, the background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display,
The display means includes:
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the display of the amount of the award;
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and starting to display the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
A gaming machine characterized by: